Product Support for: Digitrax Big Book of DCC -> Big Book of DCC (Digitrax)

The Digitrax Big Book of DCC is available for purchase on amazon.com. Most of the contents of the book are available at no charge on the Digitrax website and Tech Support Depot. Click here to go to the Big Book of DCC product page.

Q:  Will Digitrax Transponding affect my existing boosters, track wiring or locomotive pickups?A:  No. Digitrax transponding is designed to be sued with DCC compatible boosters made by all DCC manufacturers, track wiring & locomotive pickups without causing any damage or operational problems with existing DCC track signals. Unlike other "bi-directional" systems, no high current spikes are used by Digitrax transponding that can cause problems with boosters and wiring. Digitrax transponding does not require the replacement or modification of existing control equipment or infrastructure.

Is it possible to configure the PM42 for auto reversing without a Digitrax throttle? We're accustomed to working in the Digitrax operating environment, so our answer is theoretical at best. However, it would seem that any operating software with a LocoNet interface could be used to set the PM42 address, using the software as a throttle in this situation.

Q:  Can I use non-Digitrax decoders on a Transponding layout?A: Yes.  If you want to add transponding to a decoder that does not have the feature, add TL1 or TF4 to the decoder.  Some non-Digitrax decoders that use supersonic features are not compatible with transponding unless you switch off the supersonic feature. Digitrax supersonic decoders are compatible with transponding and can be used in supersonic mode while transponding.

Q:  Can I use Transponding with existing Digitrax decoder installations?A:  Once transponder receivers are installed on the layout, you can run any transponder equipped locomotive. All current production Digitrax decoders are transponder equipped. Older Digitrax decoders models without transponders and decoders made by manufacturers that don't support transponding can add transponding by installing a TL1 or TF4 to the locomotive.

Note: Upgrading to Digitrax from Lenz doesn't have to mean purchasing all new equipment! This app note shows you how to salvage some of your Lenz equipment when you move up to Digitrax!

This is a list of all configuration variables (CVs) and their factory default values in decimal and hexadecimal notation used by Digitrax mobile decoders.  Simpler decoders access only a few of these CVs, while advanced decoders access many, if not all, of these CVs.  

The sound in your decoder shuts down after you stop it and you are not using a Digitrax system for control. On some DCC systems decoders are not addressed by DCC packets after the locomotive is set to 0 speed. In this case after the CV11 timeout elapses (6 second factory default setting for SoundFX decoders), sound will shut down. To remove the timeout and prevent sound shutdown, set CV11=00.  This would leave the sound in the locomotive on until you remove power from the loco.Digitrax command stations continue to refresh locomotives by periodically sending packets to them as long ...

  Digitrax AR1 is a DCC Automatic Reversing Controller.  We have become aware of another product of a similar name that may cause our customers some confusion. Circuitron makes an automatic reversing unit called the AR-1 that is used for automatic reversing of analog powered trains. The Digitrax AR1 is not the same device and does not work in the same way.

Includes 3 Signal Masts that can be used as Signal Mast Bases in any scale or can be painted and detailed and used as N-scale signal masts.Making these circuit boards look like signals is easy, just paint the mast silver and the heads black (be sure not to cover the LED with paint), then add targets and hoods for a reasonable facsimile of a signal. Another option is to cut off the circuit board mast from the base and attach a signal from another manufacturer.

You can simply add a TL1 or TF4 to locos with decoders made by other DCC manufacturers. In the case of some supersonic decoders made by other DCC companies that are not transponding compatible, you will need to turn off the supersonic feature when you want to use transponding. Digitrax supersonic decoders are compatible with transponding and can be used in supersonic mode while transponding.

Q: I have a Lenz Set 100 and was wondering if I can use my DCC system and use the Digitrax signaling and detection components. What about other DCC systems?A: Yes, Digitrax detection and signaling will work with any DCC system.  You will need to install a LocoNet network for the LocoNet components to communicate with each other and use a PR3 or MS100 to interface with a computer running software such as Railroad and Co. 

Will Digitrax work in an outdoor setting to control LGB, Bachmann, and Aristocraft engines on a small layout, possibly in a 20 x 20 area? What starter set would you recommend to run in the area stated? I would like wireless operation. Digitrax will work in that environment, with the same warnings that are associated with all other electrically powered devices and outdoor model railroads that use track power. The command systems must be protected from moisture, the track must be clean and the stationary decoders are not weatherproof. Wireless operation can be either infrared or radio, with radio being ...

Using Digitrax Decoders with AC Motors and Lionel Type E UnitsThis application note shows how Lionel users and other users of AC motors can use DCC to run their layouts.This example shows a wiring diagram for an AC universal motor with two-wire field coil. For this type of motor you must add a bridge rectifier to control the polarity to the motor's field coil.  This type of motor is found in AC locos built from the 1950s through today.Some Lionel type AC locos have motors with three wire field coils and an E Unit.  Half of the coil is used ...

On layouts set up for Digitrax transponding with transponders in locos and rolling stock and transponder receivers installed on the layout, the DT40x’s FIND Key is used to turn on the find command. The FIND function lets you see the zone location of transponders on the layout in your throttle display. To use the FIND Command: 1. The layout must have Digitrax transponder receivers (BDL16x & RX4s) installed and configured. 2. The loco or other rolling stock that you want to track must have a transponder installed.  This can be either a transponding decoder or a stand alone transponder. 3. ...

This Application note shows how Marklin Users can have the power and reliability of Digitrax boosters along with their Marklin command stations! Notes: 1. Before applying power to the booster, use a short length of wire to short the 2 gray terminals (SYNC & GROUND) on the DB100. This forces the DB100 into the booster mode when the power is applied to it. Set the MODE switch to "P/R" for auto reversing operation or to "RUN" for normal booster operation. 2. Make a cable with 6 conductor RJ12 cable with a 6 conductor male plug on the DB100 end and ...

If I use a non-Digitrax compatible system, what features of the PM42 Auto reverse/Short Circuit Managers (SCM) will I lose?The PM42 can be used as a stand alone Auto reversing unit and Short Circuit Manager with many other non-Digitrax systems, but for systems without LocoNet capability a number of networked management features will not be available.For example, the PM42 sends out real-time, event driven (non-polled) information to the LocoNet about fault problems and resolution, auto reverse actions and also identifies the affected sub-districts. This allows other devices, such as PCs, the Digitrax Signaling system, Digitrax Transponding or other detection and ...

I own a Digitrax Starter Set that is now discontinued. Can I still use it and can it be upgraded?LocoNet lets you use all Digitrax LocoNet components in your system no matter when you purchased them. You can continue to use what you already own with new components as they become available. Note:  This will work with all starter sets except for Challenger. If you have a Challenger Set and you want to move up, the best thing to do is to purchase one of the new sets and use the DB100 series booster that came with your Challenger as ...

I have Diesels with Atlas sound or decoder, Bachmann EZ command and Soundtraxx decoders. Will the DCC Super Chief work with these decoders? Yes. Because the Atlas, Bachmann and Soundtraxx decoders are DCC compatible, they will work with any Digitrax system. There may be a issues related to programming with these decoders that require special attention. Please consult the decoder instructions for the particular locomotive to determine if any special steps are necessary in your particular situation.

Digitrax SoundFX decoders will automatically operate on smooth DC power unless analog mode conversion has been disabled. The sound will not start until approximately 5 volts is applied to the track.  Due to this characteristic of analog operation with a DCC decoder installed, the start up sound will not play.

I want the top of the line Digitrax Set. Which one should I buy?Super Chief Extra with Duplex Radio.  

Transponding is proprietary technology of Digitrax Inc.  Transponding works with existing DCC compatible layouts. RailCom is proprietary technology of Lenz Elecktronik. This is sometimes referred to as "bi-directional communication."  It requires modifications to existing DCC equipment for proper operation.The two methods are not compatible, they do not use the same technology.

Digitrax Series 3 and later mobile decoders are reset by setting CV08 to a value of 08 to reset everything or 09 to reset every thing EXCEPT the loadable speed table.Earlier Digitrax decoders require resetting each CV individually. To reset earlier Digitrax mobile decoders: Reset your decoder to the factory settings by going into program mode and manually resetting the following CVs to these values: CV01=03 CV29=06 CV03=00 CV04=00 CV02=00 CV05=00 CV06=00 If you set up loadable speed tables, you may also need to reset CV65=00 CV66=00 CV67=00 CV68-93=00 CV91=00 CV95=00    

What is the Digitrax LocoMotion(™) System? The LocoMotion(™) System is available with many decoders. It offers: 128 speed step control Smooth deceleration to stop before changing direction when locomotive is reversed Torque compensation for the smoothest operation ever Momentum with acceleration and deceleration settings Set normal direction of travel for your loco Switching speed feature for quick access to slower switching speeds Simple 3 step speed tables are easy to set up Advanced 28 step speed tables with 256 level resolution Series 3 decoders have smooth scaleable speed stabilization feature

The LGB MTS (Multi-Train System) is DCC based, so a system such as Digitrax Super Chief 8 Amp and a high current power supply such as the Digitrax PS2012 (rated at 20 amps) will work successfully.However, the LGB system is not a pure DCC system and there are reports of problems when Digitrax units are used to program LGB decoders, especially the sound decoders.  The latest LGB MTS decoders (Generation III) will operate with NMRA DCC systems, however some of the sounds and other functions may not work.  Some users have reported creating a "hybrid" system, but we do not recommend that ...

Your locomotives look like the real thing, Digitrax LocoMotion™ System makes them run like the real thing, too!   128 speed step control.   Smooth deceleration to stop before changing direction when locomotive is reversed. No sudden, non-prototypical stops!   Torque compensation for the smoothest operation ever.   Momentum with acceleration and deceleration settings.   Set normal direction of travel for your loco.   Switching speed feature for quick access to slower switching speeds.   Simple 3 step speed tables are easy to set up.   Advanced 28 step speed tables with 256 level resolution.   Scaleable speed stabilization feature. ...

We have a number of customers who are running Digitrax alongside their existing block detection circuitry. There are numerous block detection schemes and circuits, and we cannot cover all the variations here. Generally, it is necessary to isolate the block detector power supply and ground system of your existing block detector system from that of the Digital boosters. The most common detectors use "back to back" high current diodes to sense block current-draw. Detectors with "opto-isolated" or relay outputs will generally have no problem sensing current draw of a loco, etc., on the DCC current, and will signal the occupancy ...

I am getting a DH165LO decoder and a SFX004 Soundbug. Will these function on standard DC power? Yes. The DH165 series has "analog mode conversion"; the default setting is for operation in both DC and DCC environments. There are some that do not want this feature, and it can be disabled by setting CV29. The SFX004 also operates in a DC environment, and the analog mode conversion can be turned off via CV29. If so, how? Early on, Digitrax recognized that locomotives are sometimes operated in DC environments, and the conversion feature was built into the firmware. In practice, those ...

Digitrax Command Stations can operate one locomotive on your layout that does not have a decoder installed. This loco is called an "analog," "conventional," or "non-DCC equipped" locomotive. To operate an analog locomotive with Digitrax you will use address 00 to send commands to the locomotive.  The magic that makes this happen is called zero stretching. With Zero Stretching, an analog locomotive going forward receives an unusually long positive voltage, followed by a very short negative voltage. The much larger positive voltage ensures the locomotive moves forward. The brief negative pulse causes a low buzzing that will vary with the speed of the locomotive. This method ...

1.  Install BDL16 series occupancy detector(s).  BDL16, BDL162 and BDL168 occupancy detectors can be used together on the same layout.2.  Add RX4 transponder receivers to the zones you want to set up for transponding. (You won't need to cover every detection section on the railroad for effective coverage and reporting. Some areas will be detection only sections while others will have full transponding as needed.)  Use either two RX4s with your BDL168 to set up 8 transponding zones or use one RX4 if you only need 4 transponding zones.3.  All current production Digitrax decoders are transponder equipped. If you have decoders ...

LocoNet System ArchitectureDigitrax LocoNet is a Peer to Peer local area network (LAN) designed specifically for model railroad operation.  System architecture is the biggest difference among DCC systems, the way the components of a DCC system communicate among themselves. LocoNet wiring is cost effective, flexible and expandable to accommodate almost anything you want to do with your railroad today and in the future.System ExpansionHere are some of the expansion possibilities available with LocoNet. With Digitrax LocoNet your DCC journey starts at the Main Station with your first “starter” set. From there, it’s up to you. You can add:  Mobile decoders ...

This crane is fully controllable by your Digitrax system. The crane itself turns 360 degrees, the boom raises and lowers, the hook raises and lowers. An electromagnet and searchlight are optional and can also be controlled from your throttle. Only one can be used at a time, but they both come in the same package.Here is a step by step guide to using it with your Digitrax system.The decoder has an address of '08' and is a 28 speed step decoder - selecting the crane requires doing what is known as a "status edit". Hit SEL, turn a knob to ...

Function Controls F9-F12 Some Broadway Limited Locomotives use Functions F0-F12 when running in DCC mode.  In some cases F9-F12 do not respond properly.  To remedy this problem, simply reset the locomotive to the factory default setting per the Broadway Limited Instructions you received with your locomotive. Note:  F9-F12 are accessible on the DT400 throttle when used in conjunction with the DCS100 command station.

Function Controls F9-F12 Not Responding Properly on Broadway Limited LocomotivesSome Broadway Limited Locomotives use Functions F0-F12 when running in DCC mode. In some cases F9-F12 do not respond properly. To remedy this problem, simply reset the locomotive to the factory default setting per the Broadway Limited Instructions you received with your locomotive.Note: F9-F12 are accessible on the DT400 & DT402 series throttles when used in conjunction with the DCS100 command station.

Security ElementsThe Digitrax Signaling System is organized around the concept of what we call "security elements", which are similar to what U.S. prototype railroads call "plants" or "interlockings". The Digitrax SE8C signal decoder displays aspects for up to 32 heads for 8 individual security elements (plants) using either a LocoNet Throttle or a computer with compatible software. When used with associated occupancy detectors and compatible software, the SE8C can be set up to protect the turnout with signals as shown by the example below. Note that trains can move from A to B, A to C, B to A or ...

Many thanks to Dick Sutcliffe, Superintendent BR &T Railway Co. for this application note!Install the DN121 in the tender   1. The tender is easy to open by removing two screws so you can pull the decoder out and put in a plug when running on DC layouts.   2. Use a piece of styrene to raise the decoder off the weight.   3. Notch the front edge of the tender frame to bring the wires through to loco (all power pick up is in the loco).   4. Split the loco frame to isolate the motor brushes, remove the contact springs in the ...

Proven technology for bi-directional layout control without the need for modifications to your existing DCC system investment. Know the detection section and/or zone location and identification of any specific locomotive or other rolling stock equipped with a transponding device. Yes, now your dispatcher will be able to know "who you are and where you are"! Location and identification information are updated constantly on LocoNet and can be displayed on a track diagram. Adds operations mode readback of CVs to your layout. Data received by the system from mobile decoders can be used for display, automation, sound processing and much more. ...

Zephyr Xtra (DCS51) and Zephyr (DCS50) systems can program Soundtraxx Tsunami decoders using Blast Mode Programming on the Mainline.  Blast Mode Programming will program EVERYTHING sitting on the main line track so, you MUST remove everything from the track that you are not programming or use an isolated piece of track connected to Rail A & B. NOTE: Track power must be ON during Blast Mode Programming.  Blast Mode programming will work with all sound decoders not just Tsunami. You will not be able to read back CVs using Blast Mode Programming.  To use Blast Mode Programming with Zephyr, close ...

What about using a Digitrax-decoder-equipped locomotive on a layout having only DC power?It is possible, but analog operation of DCC equipped locomotives is becoming a bit of a rarity. In earlier times some locomotives were delivered from the manufacturer with a DCC decoder in place and a jumper plug was used to select the operating environment. Digitrax still offers a jumper plug for use in some configurations; you remove the decoder and replace it with the DHDP or DNDP. With later generations of decoders, it is possible to operate on a DC layout with the decoder in place. To quote ...

Performing factory decoder reset using Digitrax Zephyr Xtra (DCS51) or Zephyr (DCS50)Overview:To reset a Digitrax decoder to factory defaults the user must set CV08 to a value of 08. It is recommended that this procedure be performed on the dedicated service mode programming track using direct mode programming.Procedure:1. Place the decoder equipped locomotive on an electrically isolated service-mode programming track which is connected to Programming Outputs Prog 'A' & 'B'.2. Press the PROG MODE key until “dir” appears in the LED display.3. Press the STEPS CV key. (The LED display should read “t###” with the # symbols replaced by actual digits)4. Enter “08” using ...

This application note is courtesy of Michael K. Perrin, and addresses the installation of an N-Scale decoder in the Bachmann F40PH (now discontinued).  This note calls for using either DN93 or DN140, both of which have been discontinued.  Current decoders such as the DZ125 or DZ143 and other similar N scale decoders can be used.1) Cut a place for the decoder in the back recess in the frame. Because this is a "sandwich" frame there is no room for the decoder without using a saw or Dremel tool to make a cavity for the decoder. (This is the hardest part of the ...

You can easily control sound units like the Keller SU1990 by using the function leads on Digitrax Decoders and DCC command station that can control decoder functions. These instructions for connecting a Keller Engineering Diesel Sound unit to Digitrax DH83FX & DH140 series decoders was writtne many years ago.  Any modern Digitrax decoder with 4 function leads can be used. Equipment Needed:1) A Digitrax Throttle, Booster/Command Station or other DCC command station capable of controlling decoder function outputs.2) Any Digitrax decoder with at least 4 function leads will work here.3) The locomotive you wish to convert, be sure to check the ...

Note: These instructions cover the hardwired installation of any Digitrax decoder with wires into a Kato GP35 H0 Diesel. Currently, the recommended decoder for current production GP35's from Kato are the DH163K0 board replacement decoder.  Using the board replacement decoders are much simpler and cleaner installation than the one described here.Tools Needed for Decoder InstallationYou'll need a few simple tools:1. A soldering iron, preferably temperature controlled.2. Solder3. Screwdriver4. Small diagonal cutters for cutting and stripping small wire5. TweezersMotor Isolation for Kato GP35Carefully remove the loco's shell and weight.To isolate the motor, disconnect the brass strips (motor brushes) from the track pick up ...

Digitrax SoundFX Decoder Troubleshooting Guide This troubleshooting guide assumes that you are working with an operating Digitrax system that is able to run trains and that the locomotive you are troubleshooting is operational and has a Digitrax sound decoder and speaker installed correctly.  If there is no sound, first make sure the decoder is not muted: Press the Function 8 (F8) key, and make sure F8 is OFF.  Function 8 is used to toggle between sound active (F8 OFF) and mute (F8 ON). If there is no sound and the locomotive won’t move when the address is selected on your ...

This installation procedure is for the DIGITRAX DH166/DH126 decoder. Alternatively, you can use a Digitrax DN166 in this installation. If you use the DN166 the installation will require fewer engine modifications because of the smaller physical size of the decoder.Note any decoder of smaller physical size can be used in this installation.  DN136D, DN166, DZ126, DZ126, DZ146 are all possibilities. After removing the shell from the locomotive chassis, note the color and location of each of the various wires.  All connections must be soldered with rosin core solder and insulated with shrink tubing.We will locate the decoder in the forward ...

This application note concerns the DA120 deocder, which began production in 1997 and was discontinued around 2000. The DA120 decoder that is being shipped with the Atlas locomotives has certain variables that are available for programming. These guidelines are provided for those who are using the Wangrow or Lenz systems for programming the DA120 decoders.The following variables were selected by Atlas to be offered in the DA120. These CV's are available to be programmed on the DA120:    * CV01 - Address    * CV02 - Start Voltage    * CV03 - Acceleration Rate    * CV04 - Deceleration Rate    * CV05 - Maximum ...

Digitrax DCS210+ Options switches: These documented Option Switches are implemented and tested option settings.  It is recommended that any undocumented option switches not be changed from the Factory Defaults (OPSW40=c) values to avoid unpredictable behavior. Option switches are an advanced topic, and most factory defaults work well for most layouts. OPSW# Name State Default Opsw2 DisableCS c= disable CS - Booster only   t Opsw3 Auto Reverse c= enable Booster reverser t Opsw6 Skip_Ptrk_Imin c= ignore empty Program track           t Opsw13 Purge long     c= extended PURGE time t Opsw14 Purge Off c= disable PURGING function t ...

I have a DCS50  Zephyr system.  I'm having a great deal of problems with it when I try to run (2) loco's equipped with LOK SOUND and DCC decoders (by ESU).  What happens is that it cuts in and out 3 to 5 times on each revolution of the train. I see it cutting out on turnouts sometimes, but not on straight track.  And sometimes when the loco's are on a hard pull, like at a sharp uphill curve.  When they cut out it just isn't the loco's, but the entire railroad.With the addition of the sound electronics, power consumption ...

Note: The programming shortcut for 4-digit addressing outlined in the Digitrax Zephyr manual will not work to program the Tower 55 decoder in any programming mode on the Zeyphr throttle due to a programming timing issue with the DSC50. Please use the procedure referenced in this bulletin to access this feature.Note: If the DCS50 or DCS51 is being used as a command station with a DT400/DT400R throttle connected via the Loconet ports, then the programming shortcut for 4-digit addressing outlined in the DT400/DT400R throttle manual will work to enable the 4-digit address capability of the decoder when using the DT400/DT400R throttle ...

Many thanks to Bob Dattore for this application note!This app note details using a DN142 decoder for the installation.  This decoder is no longer in production but the following decoders would work as well:  DN135D, DN163, DZ123, DZ125, DZ143.  Any decoder that is small enough to fit could be used.The Problem:  Atlas RS1's (and RS3's & RSD4/5's) are hard to install Digitrax decoders in. There is no easy drop-in or light board replacement with back-emf capability.I have installed several Atlas Dual Mode decoders in these popular hard to fit narrow, low hood diesels with ease, by replacing the original light ...

  I have a 14x24 foot room with a shelf layout on two levels. 1st level is about 24 inches with two main lines and some industries, a moderate freight yard, moderate intermodal facility and passenger station. The second level is 18 inches and will contain one and two main lines with mostly industries. This would qualify as a "medium to large" model railroad. I would like to have 1-5 operators with 2-10 trains running at one time as permitting. At least four Universal Panels would give all operators full access to LocoNet as necessary. At least one UP each ...

This article courtesy of Ken Bessler, concerning installation of a decoder into earlier Kato C4400W's.  Current produiction of these locomotives use DN163K1C or similar board replacement decoder.I wanted to convert my 2 new Kato AC4400CW's to DCC but there were several problems:1) The recommended PnP decoder, DN163K1a has a chip right where a shell component is. Using this decoder requires shaving off the plastic retainer clip under the exhaust stack. IMHO this is not good as it leaves too little support for the stack.2) My dealer was out of stock of the PnP decoders.3) A quick look inside the loco shows ...

You can have the power and reliability of Digitrax boosters even if you use a Lenz Command Station. You can use Digitrax boosters to automate reverse loops, too. Digitrax boosters can be used with the Lenz Command Station to provide more power for driving the layout. Many customers are using DB150, DB200, or DB100 series boosters instead of LV100's because the DB150’s & DB100's are very reliable 5 amp boosters with plenty of heat sinking capability to prevent heat related booster shutdows. Equipment needed: 1) A Lenz LZ100 Command Station. 2) A DB150, DB100 or a DB200 series booster. 3) ...

Overview:To reset locomotive electronics to factory defaults the user must set CV08 to a value of 08. It is recommended that this procedure be performed on the dedicated service mode programming track using direct mode programming.* Note: This is the only programming procedure that we recommend using the programming track for. All other programming should be performed on the main track using Operations mode programming.Procedure:1. Place the DCC equipped locomotive on a dedicated service-mode programming track.* Note: The rails of this track should be connected to the PROG A & PROG B outputs on the DCS100 command station.2. Set the ...

Before sending your Digitrax Command Station or Booster in for repair try these simple steps to see if you can “bring it back from the dead” and save a possible trip to the repair shop.1. Nothing is respondingIf there are NO LEDs lit on the front panel of the Command Station or Booster: Check the power supply to the unit to make sure that it has not been knocked loose in the power socket and that the socket is powered. Check the connections from the power supply to Track A and Track B connections on the front of the unit ...

Before sending your Digitrax mobile decoder in for repair try these troubleshooting steps to see if you can “bring it back from the dead” and save a trip to the shop and possible repair charge. As with troubleshooting anything, begin checking what could be wrong methodically. Write down your observations as you work through the list to solve the problem.The most common "repair" problem we see in our repair department is decoders that are programmed incorrectly.Many decoders we receive for repair have been programmed with CV values that cause them to seem to have a problem. The good news-bad news ...

This note addresses the installation of an H0-Scale wired decoder into Bachmann Plus ABA F-7s; it calls for using a DH140, which has been retired.  Current decoders such as the DH123 or DH163 or similar wired decoders can be used. Just finished up doing a few HO Bachmann Plus F7's, ABA's to be exact. Thought maybe some of you might be interested in how the DCC conversion went on these.They are an easy conversion!1.  The full stall current for these ranged from 500-700 ma for each loco . I selected Digitrax DH140 for the A units and a DH120 for the B ...

Speed stabilization is a feature that causes the decoder to run the locomotive at a somewhat constant speed according to the throttle setting. This means that if you set your throttle to 21% of total speed, the decoder will force the motor in the locomotive to maintain a constant speed at that level no matter what the track gradient or the load on the locomotive. The SD9 is an example of a US prototype that employed a load compensating type of control technology. Many modern European locomotive prototypes use some form of load compensation of the prime-mover in response to speed ...

  Zephyr Xtra                             Super Empire Builder Xtra                            Super Chief Xtra                                                Command Station DCS51 DB150 DCS100 Current Rating 3 Amps 5 Amps 5 Amps or 8 Amps Throttle DCS51 DT402 DT402 Throttle Controls Single Knob, Direction Switch Dual click encoder throttles Dual click encoder throttles Function Control F0-F29 F0-F29 F0-F29 Keypad Full Numeric Keypad Full Numeric Keypad Full Numeric Keypad Display Large LED Multi-line Backlit LCD Multi-line Backlit LCD Throttle Capacity 20 22 120 Loco Capacity 20 22 120 Loco Address Range 00-9000+ 00-9000+ 00-9000+ Stationary Address Range 01-999 00-999 00-999 Turnout Position Reporting Yes, last command sent Yes, last ...

CV # Use Decoder DefaultValue ValueRange CV01 Address All 01-9999 01-127 * CV02 Start Voltage All 001 0-255; higher is more voltage CV04 Acceleration Rate All 000 0 - 31 CV04 Deceleration Rate All 000 0 - 31 CV05 Maximum Voltage Gen4 - 0 (disabled) 1 - 255; lower is slower CV06 Midpoint Voltage All 0 (disabled) 1 - 255 CV07 Manufacturer's Version ID All Variable - CV08 Manufacturer's ID, Decoder Reset All FX3 129 08 to reset,09 reset leave speed tables CV13 DC Functions "On" FX, not on FX3 - See decoder documentation CV15 Decoder Lock FX3 000 See ...

Digital Command Control (DCC) has specific electrical requirements that must be provided for your layout control system to operate properly.Input PowerAll DCC systems require an external power supply.  Digitrax manufactures several power supplies for our command stations and boosters: The 3 Amp PS415 (the Zephyr Xtra power supply) The 5 Amp PS515 for all Digitrax 5 amp command stations and boosters The powerful 20 Amp PS2012 can be used for multiple 5 and 8 amp command stations and boosters  Additionally, the PS14 is available to power various other devices for your railroad.  Digitrax strongly encourages you to use our power supplies to insure satisfactory ...

This article courtesy of Ross Webster, which dates from an earlier era before Bachmann made accommodations for DCC installs:There may be others ways do to this conversion, but this is the way I found using the Digitrax DG380 (any DG wired decoder can be used for this installation) DUE TO SOME OF THE FRAGILE ITEMS ON THE SHAY I WORKED ON A FOAM PAD SO THERE WAS NO DAMAGE TO ANY OF THE SMALL PARTS.I first tested the electrical items and made the following determinations.Free running for the two trucks was .8 amps, total. Stall, was 4.6 amps total for both trucks. Smoke ...

  Zephyr Xtra Super Empire Builder Xtra  Super Chief Xtra Command Station DCS51 DB150 DCS100 Current Rating 3.0 Amps 5 Amps 5 Amps or 8 Amps Throttle DCS51 DT402 DT402 Throttle Controls Single Knob, Direction Switch Dual click encoder throttles Dual click encoder throttles Function Control F0-F28 F0-F28 F0-F28 Keypad Full Numeric Keypad Full Numeric Keypad Full Numeric Keypad Display Large LED Multi-line Backlit LCD Multi-line Backlit LCD Throttle Capacity 20 22 120 Loco Capacity 20 22 120 Loco Address Range 00-9000+ 00-9000+ 00-9000+ Stationary Address Range 01-999 00-999 00-999 Turnout Position Reporting No Yes, last command sent Yes + actual ...

Digitrax Query Mode: The new generation of Digitrax Advanced Command Stations and other new products from ~October 2016 onwards include some convenient new self-diagnostic and external diagnostic capabilities and methods, to help keep LocoNet systems and devices healthy and working optimally, without requiring additional tools. The DCS240 and DCS210 Advanced Command Stations include “Query Mode” diagnostic information that can be interrogated or read-out using enhanced capabilities of DT500 throttles. Advanced Command Station Query information is grouped into six broad groups of data/diagnostic information displayable by a DT500/DT500D: “Lnt”: LocoNet Device Type/product info “ELE”: Device Electrical information, voltages/currents, etc. “Lnt”: LocoNet ...

Digitrax Complete Train Control By Zana & A.J. Ireland Digitrax Complete Train Control makes reliable, realistic train operation and simplified layout wiring a reality. Digital Command Control is incorporated within the Digitrax system to let you control multiple trains independently on the same section of track without blocking. In the real world, engineers control the speed and direction of real trains. Engines operate under their own power independent of the track. Each engine has its own motion characteristics like how fast it speeds up (acceleration) and how long it takes to slow down (deceleration). A locomotive's performance is influenced by ...

Replacement for current model throttle battery compartment covers.

Easy to use tools to enhance your Digitrax experience on the iPhone/iPad!

.672” x 1.074” x .259” 17.08mm x 27.28mm x 6.6mm Digitrax Easy Connect 9 Pin Harness 1.5 Amp/2 Amp Peak Current Rating 2 FX3 Functions, 0.5 Amp Total Function Current Rating

.672” x 1.074” x .259” 17.08mm x 27.28mm x 6.6mm Digitrax Easy Connect 9 Pin Harness 1.5 Amp/2 Amp Peak Current Rating 2 FX3 Functions, 0.5 Amp Total Function Current Rating

.672” x 1.074” x .259” 17.08mm x 27.28mm x 6.6mm Digitrax Easy Connect 9 Pin Harness 1.5 Amp/2 Amp Peak Current Rating 6 FX3 Functions, 0.5 Amp Total Function Current Rating

.672” x 1.074” x .259” 17.08mm x 27.28mm x 6.6mm Digitrax Easy Connect 9 Pin Harness 1.5 Amp/2 Amp Peak Current Rating 6 FX3 Functions, 0.5 Amp Total Function Current Rating

5-Pack Dummy plug for Digitrax N scale Harness system

5-pack Digitrax N-Scale Wire Harness

Digitrax N-Scale Wire Harness with 8 Pin plug

Keeps locos & sound running during power interruptions caused by dirty or bad track.

Keeps locos & sound running during power interruptions caused by dirty or bad track.

Keeps locos & sound running during power interruptions caused by dirty or bad track.

Keeps locos & sound running during power interruptions caused by dirty or bad track.

This article was originally posted on this site in 2006, but the source material dates back much further than that, probably back to the early 1990's, when DCC was an emerging control system. The article discusses non-sound mobile decoder programming operations. Many of the issues discussed in this article are less relevant when using recently produced decoders, but this text still does cover some questions which may be raised when you are using mobile decoders which were manufactured by other companies. These decoders will operate in the Digitrax environment, but you may need to make some adjustments.The earliest Digitrax mobile ...

Please note this is for factory default settings. Step 1: Step 2: Step 3 - Download the app: Click on the Icon below to download the app to your iPhone or iPad. Step 4 - On your iPhone or iPad do the following: Step 5:  Step 6: Step 7: Step 8: Step 9a: Step 9b: Step 10: Step 11 - You're ready to run trains!

A model railroad continues to be interesting if there are opportunities for growth and for operation. Extra detail can be added, scenery can be enhanced, but in the end, if the railroad is interesting to operate, it will continue to be a source of enjoyment for its owner for many years. The Texas & Southwestern has many opportunities for interesting train operations. The Texas & Southwestern is both a passenger railroad and a freight railroad. Passenger Point to Point Our trusty RDC (rail diesel car) allows for one train to operate in a point to point fashion. In fact, all ...

The Life-Like RS2 locomotive frame is approx 1mm wider than than the Kato design for the RS2. Accordingly, special care must be taken to assure the loco frame does not come in contact with the DN163K2 decoder contacts. Please refer to the pictures below for details on the modification: Cut a piece of Kapton tape approx. 1/4" square and position it on an Xacto® type knife, small screwdriver blade or other similar tool.  Place the tape underneath the loco frame as shown above. A top view of the correctly placed tape. A side view of the correctly placed tape. Remember ...

I want to run a small 12V -16V AC motor via DCC and am not sure if you have a decoder for this and if so how to connect up.For Variable Speed:Some Digitrax decoders, such as the DG583S, can be programmed to operate AC motors. When you program CV61 to a value of 004, Digitrax decoders with split field motor drive capabilities will convert their motor leads to drive a "split field" AC motor instead of the default DC motor. This lets you run Maerklin 3-pole AC motors and similar motors in a number of locos built in Europe with ...

What are the most common applications for the PR3? 1) Stand alone Sound FX programmer As a bench tool the PR3 is the first USB and second device designed by Digitrax for the programming of the SoundFX sound decoder. The PR3 does write to and read from the sound patterns of any SoundFX sound decoder. In addition the PR3 can write to and read from any CV of most current non sound mobile and function decoders found in today's market place. 2) Digitrax command station LocoNet to Computer interface As a layout control tool the PR3 is a second generation ...

I am putting the finishing touches on my 10 x 20 foot H0 railroad. It is a copy of the Cajon Pass, Salt Lake & Santa Fe RR by John Armstrong (#86 in the 101 Track Plans by Linn Westcott) [Kalmbach Publishing, ISBN 0-89024-512-6; still in print]. I have decided to go with DCC and my local hobby store recommended Digitrax. The layout is in my basement, I will be the only operator, the plan has 54 track switches (34 NJ International twin coils and 20 Tortoise turnout motors). Can you give me an idea as to what equipment I ...

  Q:  I have read in some of the model magazines that the F2 button on the DT400 is a pressure sensitive playable whistle button. I have not noticed any difference in sound with the F2 button on my DT400. Is there some way to determine if this feature is present on my throttle? A:  Most Digitrax DT400 and all DT402 series throttles have the capability of implementing the playable whistle feature when used with Digitrax sound decoders.Prior to the release of Digitrax sound decoders this feature was considered as an experimental throttle feature and was not fully documented. Once Digitrax released ...

Under what conditions can the PR3 be used as a Stand Alone LocoNet Terminator? The PR3 is so designed so that it can be configured to act as a stand alone LocoNet controller in the event that a Digitrax command station is unavailable for the control of a series of LocoNet compatible devices. There are two major situations that would require the PR3 to act as a stand alone LocoNet controller. The first situation is where one of the many advanced features offered by the LocoNet and the various LocoNet compatible devices is desired to be used on a layout ...

  Q:  Can I use a PM42 with a non-Digitrax DCC Command system? A:  The PM42 was specifically designed to work with Digitrax Direct Home wired layouts. Any system that is configured this way will probably work with the PM42 with no interoperability issues. Digitrax has no control over or knowledge of each specific non-Digitrax system and how it may interact with the PM42. The PM42 can be used as a stand-alone auto-reversing unit and short circuit manager with many third party DCC systems, but for systems without LocoNet capability a number of the networked management features will not be available. ...

The Nemo Junction module has a total of seven color light signals that regulate the flow of train traffic through this interlocking plant. Controlling the Signals with SE8C The SE8C is the signal driver, sending current to the various LED's of the color light signals. Each signal is operated via switch commands from the Zephyr. The SE8C has eight Driver Sockets, identified as DRV1 - DRV8. : A Signal Driver Cable (a 10-conductor ribbon cable) is plugged into a SE8C Driver Socket to control as many as four signal heads per Driver Socket. Each signal head can display 4 lighting ...

What are the different operational modes available in the PR3? The PR3 is the combination of two previous Digitrax devices: the PR2 decoder programmer and the MS100 LocoNet to computer interface. The PR3 can be configured through manual (control panel buttons) or automatically (software) means to perform any one of the following three operations: a) The PR3 can be configured to function as a stand alone decoder programmer. In this mode the PR3 can program the configuration variables of most DCC decoders and the sound effects of the Digitrax Sound FX sound decoders. b) The PR3 can be configured to ...

The Digitrax DCS50 Zephyr is set at the factory to send 128 speed step commands to all mobile decoders.If you have a non-Digitrax decoder that can’t run in 128 speed step mode, you can change the number of speed steps the DCS50 sends to that decoder so that you will be able to control the decoder. This is called status editing the decoder. When you status edit a decoder, the DCS50 will send a different format to that specific decoder address without affecting the 128 speed step operation of Digitrax decoders and other 128 speed step decoders on the railroad.NOTE: ...

DH165K1A Board Replacement Decoder Fits Kato SD40-2, AC4400 1. Carefully remove the locomotive’s shell from the frame. Note the orientation for proper reinstallation (Figure 1). 2. Remove the four track power pickup wires clipped to the lightboard at mid point (Figure 1). 3. Unscrew the two screws securing the lightboard and lift it from the frame. (Figure 2) 4. Remove the lightboard by pulling it gently straight up, off the motor clips. (Figure 3) 5. Decoder installation is the reverse of what we’ve done so far. Snap the decoder into place over the motor clips. Be sure motor clips are ...

The Life-Like GP18 locomotive can be modified to accept the DN163K2 board replacement decoder. The locomotive samples used by Digitrax for this instatllation needed to have the frame engagement clearance slots under the cab on the fireman-side widened about 1mm towards the rear of the locomotive (long hood end). This can be done with a small file or Dremel type tool, to allow the decoder to properly engage the casting with the power tab on this side. The engineer-side slots are OK to fit the decoder power pickup tab on this side. Be sure to check the motor tabs are safely ...

In response to questions about the differences among the DCC systems that are currently available from different companies, I offer the following comments & observations. You may have heard that all the systems are pretty much the same or you may have seen “comparison” charts in various DCC companies’ literature, in magazines or “analysis” on the Internet by “impartial observers.” Unfortunately, it is almost impossible to break down the system and company differences on a simple chart & the people who write the “impartial analysis” are usually not really impartial. As you read these comments, please keep in mind that ...

SoundLoader and PR3 have been tested to work on PC compatible computers running at 550MHz and up with Windows XP or Vista, 512MB of RAM. Other combinations of hardware and software such as Windows 98 may also work, but are not supported by Digitrax, and have not been tested to operate properly. Installation consists of three steps: Hardware installation, software installation, and software setup. Below is a photograph of the actual hardware connections required for SoundFX programming. Assemble the PR3 hardware as shown in the diagram below and connect to an appropriate power supply (Digitrax PS14 or equivalent). Note the ...

I understand that LocoNet is used for transponding "feedback."  How can Digitrax systems handle both DCC and transponding without interfering with other track level communication and without adding another communication or feedback bus like other system have to do?LocoNet is a true network with future expandability built in. Part of that future is here now with transponding. LocoNet was engineered from the very beginning with things like this in mind.If you are already using Digitrax LocoNet, you will not have to add a "feedback bus" since this is already incorporated into LocoNet's design! If you are using transponding with a ...

  Can I add Radio and IR to my Zephyr Xtra?Yes.Adding radio and/or IR to Zephyr and Zephyr Xtra is the same as adding it to any other existing Digitrax layout or Digitrax Starter Set. Digitrax offers InfraRed, Duplex Radio and Simplex Radio systems for wireless operation.  Any combination of these wireless methods can be used on the same layout at the same time.Infra Red Wireless OperationAll current Digitrax throttles are Infrared capable (InfraReady) in that they come from the factory equipped with the IR emitters required to send IR information to LocoNet.  To use this functionality, you only need to ...

I have many many loco's. How do I determine which mobile decoder to select for each one? First, modelers with many locomotives often become bewildered at the prospect of converting all of their locomotives to DCC. Take it one step at a time. Consider that you are not operating all of those locomotives at the same time; start by gradually converting your locomotives, beginning with your favorites. Digitrax maintains a list of suggested decoders for specific locomotives on our website.  The Digitrax Decoder Selector can be found here: http://www.digitrax.com/products/engine-matrix/decoderJust because your particular locomotive is not listed does not mean that ...

Although this is a simple railroad, it will have some advanced features. When the railroad's sectional modules are first assembled, the electrical connections are simple. The railroad will be controlled with a DCS50 Zephyr, using a PM42 Power Manager for short circuit protection. One section of the PM42 will control the inner oval of track, a second section of the PM42 will control the outer segment. This is done so that if a train derails on one loop, the train operation on the other loop will not be affected. Because the DCS50 is rated at 2.5 amps, the PM42 must ...

Can I add Radio and IR to my Big Boy?Yes.Adding radio and/or IR to Big Boy is the same as adding it to any other existing Digitrax layout or Digitrax Starter Set. Digitrax offers InfraRed, Duplex Radio and Simplex Radio systems for wireless operation. Any combination of these wireless methods can be used on the same layout at the same time.Infra Red Wireless OperationAll current Digitrax throttles are Infrared capable (InfraReady) in that they come from the factory equipped with the IR emitters required to send IR information to LocoNet. To use this functionality, you only need to add one ...

Application Note: Walthers/Life-Like F7 H0-Scale steps needed for the DH163D DH123D decoder installation. Remove packing protectors screwed to coupler pockets: Carefully remove shell by spreading sides at side windows: Here's an alternate method for removing the loco shell - our F7 unit had a particularly stubborn shell. In place of the X-acto knives pictured, we recommend toothpicks or something a little safer.. Remove DC Plug (or a DC Printed Circuit Board in this case) from the wiring harness: DC Plug shown removed: Plug DH123D or DH163D decoder to 9 pin wire harness and mount it as shown: Reinstall loco shell.

Digitrax SoundFX lets you make your locos sound like the real thing!Remember, your Digitrax SoundFX decoder is ready to run and will operate and generate sound using address 03 with no additional programming.On your Digitrax system, simply select the locomotive's address and the sound will start. On some DCC systems, it is necessary to select the locomotive address AND send a command to start the sounds. When used in conjunction with a separate DCC motor decoder in a single locomotive it is most practical to program both decoders to the same address and operating modes.For a more prototypical railroading experience, ...

I have an extensive collection of Z-scale locomotives (some are older (15-20 years) Z-Scale Maerklin equipment).  Can I convert the locos to Digitrax, or must I buy some other brand of loco to use Digitrax?Maybe yes, maybe no.  It depends upon the size of the locomotive and how much space is inside.There are several Z-Scale layouts that use Digitrax decoders.  Z scale railroaders are very persistent and precise so, they are often able to install decoders where members of other scales would fear to tread.  Digitrax continues to design smaller and smaller decoders aimed at the Z scale market.  Z Scale ...

Most modern command stations and decoders are set up to run 28/128 speed steps.  If you are using older command stations or decoders you may need to adjust one or the other to get the trains to run.Why are more speed steps better?The reason you want to use a command station and decoders with 128 speed steps is for smoother speed control of your locomotives.   Digital command control signals are just that, digital.  When you send speed commands with your throttle, you are sending digital instructions telling the decoder to change from the current speed to a different speed.  When ...

This section discusses the installation of the physical wiring of the Texas & Southwestern. Underneath the completed Texas & Southwestern are various wires and cables which allow you to operate your railroad. Initially, seeing all these wires can be intimidating, but as you will note, they have been grouped and bundled so that identifying the individual wires is easy. There are two groups of wires under the railroad; one group, the power bus, delivers power to the tracks and to the stationary decoders that operate the track switches. The other group of wires is the black cable for LocoNet and ...

The front panel of the DB150 Super Empire Builder has electrical connection points, indicator lamps, LocoNet connections and toggle switches which give status indications, configure and connect the unit for your railroad. Power Input The two “POWER IN” terminals on all Digitrax boosters & command stations are the power input connections. Please see the related articles about power requirements for the DB150. Power Supply Digitrax recommends the PS515 power supply to power the DB150. There are many other transformers and power packs that can supply the input power for the DB150. Check with your Digitrax dealer for suggestions. Most regular ...

The option switches and settings you can use to customize your BDL168 are indicated in the table below. These option switches on your BDL168 are set up using a Digitrax throttle's SWITCH commands. (This can only be done with a Digitrax LocoNet throttle or equivalent software). SWITCH mode is normally used for operating turnouts by issuing closed ("c") or thrown ("t") commands. In the case of your BDL168, each switch address is a BDL168 option switch. The following table shows what each OpSw is used for when it is set for thrown or closed. Factory settings are indicated by shaded ...

  CV29 is assigned a single value which chooses a combination of specific effects: 1. Speed step control. 2. Speed table On or Off. 3. Analog mode conversion On or Off. 4. Normal Direction of Travel (NDOT). 5. 2 digit addressing or 4 digit addressing. 2-digit or 4-digit Addressing The decoder's address is the identification number programmed into specific decoder that lets that decoder recognize commands sent to it by the command station. Once you program the decoder's address, it will be remembered in the decoder until you re-program it. All Digitrax current production decoders can be set up with ...

The slip switch is a track element that has both a crossing at grade and also a set of movable points which allow trains to both cross another track and also change track.  The Crossing The crossing allows tracks to cross each other at grade.  The Slip SwitchThe more complex slip switch allows trains to both cross and to change tracks: In the schematic below, you will note that the slip switch is more compact than ordinary turnouts.  As a result, they are often found in high track density areas such as passenger terminals, where space is at a premium. ...

Kato N-Scale DD51 steps needed for the DN163K1D decoder Carefully remove the DD51 locomotive shells (3) and gray plastic light board retainer from the frame. Carefully remove the factory light board by sliding it toward the back of the locomotive and out from under the forward frame notches. Then gently lift the board out of the frame. Be careful not to bend or damage the motor tabs. Place one or more layers of Kapton tape on the frame underneath the forward frame clip. Carefully remove the motor tabs from the factory light board. The motor tabs attach to the board ...

CV08 is the factory reset CV for all FX3 decoders and also the Manufacturer ID CV for all decoders. This procedure is performed on a programming track. To reset all CV values to their factory default, program CV08 to a value of 008/x08 while the locomotive is on the programming track. To reset all CV values except for 28 step speed tables to their factory values set CV08 to a value of 009/x09. Earlier Digitrax decoders must be reset manually, CV by CV. This procedure may or may not work with other manufacturer's decoders. When you "read" the value of ...

Installation Notes: 1. Do not exceed the decoder’s 500mA total function output rating. 2. We recommend that the Blue wire, also called +Common or Lamp Common, be connected as shown. If you wish to omit the Blue wire in your installation, consult the Digitrax Decoder Manual for more information. 3. The head lamp should be hooked up using the Blue/+Common wire for optimal Digitrax transponding operation. 4. To use a function output with an inductive (coil) type load, see the Digitrax Decoder Manual for more information to avoid damage to the decoder. 5. See the Digitrax Decoder Manual for full ...

At first glance, the typical switching railroad would not seem to be a good candidate for DCC operations. Yes, there may be only one locomotive on many of these railroads, but that locomotive can still benefit from DCC. By adjusting the starting, mid-range and maximum speed values of this locomotive, you get very good slow speed control, perfect for the switching railroad. And, of course, if you add a second locomotive, then DCC becomes the clear choice because you are not longer having to throw toggle switches just to move around the yard. The DCC environment also gives you turnout ...

1. Carefully remove the locomotive’s shell from the frame. Notice the orientation of the shell for reinstallation. 2. Carefully remove the motor springs with tweezers. Store these springs in a safe place for later re-use. 3. Slide the factory light board forward to release it from under the clips on the locomotive frame. Be careful not to distort the frame clips as you slide and lift the light board off the frame. 4. Take the DZ123M0 decoder (noting the correct orientation of the frame pads) and slide underneath frame clips as indicated in the Figure 3. You will need to ...

The DB200+ is the 8 amp booster. It has NO command station capability. This booster was designed for adding power to layouts that run lots of locos and for large-scale layouts where power requirements are heavy.DB200+ Control PanelNOTE: DB200+ front panel graphics may vary from those shown here.  Internally the booster is the same. These instructions are written for both versions of graphics as well as the DB200+ OPTO optoisolated version of the booster. About the Green Jumper WireEvery DB200+ is shipped with a green jumper wire on the front panel Booster Terminal Plug connecting Synch & Ground or ‘Config ...

Setting up your new Zephyr: Unpack the DCS-50 command station and the PS-315 power supply. On the back of the DCS-50,locate the gray screw terminal strip.On this strip, locate the two terminals labeled “RAIL A “and “RAIL B”.Attach these terminals to your track wires.It does not matter which is which. Before proceeding to the next step,make sure the throttle knob [1] is turned all the way to “stop” and the direction/brake lever [2] is set to”brake”. [See photo blelow]. Now, find the plug on the back of the DCS-50 marked “POWER IN, 15 VAC, 2.5 AMPS”. This is where you ...

The DZ121 was discontinued in 2002.  There were some interoperability issues with Easy DCC, MRC and Lenz.  The exchange offer is no long valid.  This article is still published for reference only.At that time, Easy DCC, Lenz and MRC users could return DZ121's to Digitrax for no charge replacements that will work on their systems. There was no reason for Digitrax, Wangrow or NCE users to replace any DZ121 decoder unless they wre having problems.The text at that time:For Easy DCC and Lenz users who are having problems: To determine whether your DZ121 should be returned, read back CV07. A ...

Move to decoder installation section? on main site or set up decoder installation notes in TSD?DN123K3 Kato NW2 Installation Instructions 1. Carefully remove the locomotive’s shell from the frame (Figure 1). Notice the orientation of the shell to the frame so that you can reinstall correctly. 2. To remove the Kato NW2 standard lightboard you will need to remove the motor clips first. The NW2 Motor clips can be most easily removed by rotating the motor gently so that the circular motor brush caps release the motor clip. Next pull the motor clip directly off each side of the lightboard. ...

Steps needed for the DZ125PS or DZ143PS decoder installation: Remove couplers and carefully remove loco shell to reveal the 8 pin dummy (DC) plug. Remove 8 pin dummy (DC) plug [picture shown with plug removed]. Plug in the DZ125PS or DZ143PS with orange wired #1 pin in pin with triangle marked pin. Detail of DZ125PS or DZ143PS with orange wired #1 pin correctly oriented. Tuck decoder in cab area of loco, replace shell and reinstall couplers.

1. Carefully remove the locomotive’s shell from the frame. Notice the orientation of the shell to the frame so that you can reinstall correctly. 2. The DZ125 has 6” wires that you will solder directly to the appropriate connections inside the locomotive. The smaller size allows the decoder to be easily installed in a variety of locomotives. The bare ends of the wires are wired to the motor connections, power pickup connections and the lights according to this standard. Note: Avoid stressing the solder connections of the wires to the decoder board. If a connection is broken, carefully solder the wire ...

It means just what it says. "This Product Conforms To All Applicable NMRA Standards." An NMRA Conformance Seal is NOT an endorsement by the NMRA. It is NOT a guarantee by the NMRA or by the manufacturer. It is merely a statement that a particular product conforms to a particular test set up and administered by NMRA volunteers to assess whether, in their opinion, the product conforms to a particular NMRA Standard. Interpretations of this statement vary widely depending on whom you ask for clarification.The Real Issue is InteroperabilityInteroperability means that you don’t have to worry about a single source ...

Adding duplex radio, infrared or simplex radio to your existing Digitrax system is simple because of LocoNet.InfraRedYou probably already own a DT300, DT400, UT4 or DT402 series throttle. All of these are "InfraReady." These all come with two IR emitters pre-installed. All you have to add for IR operation is one or more UR90 Infrared Receivers to your layout. Most layouts require multiple UR90s because the infrared signal is line of sight. This means that your receiver will need a sight path to the throttles.Simplex RadioDigitrax throttles with an "R" at the end of the part number are simplex radio ...

To Test LocoNet Cables With an LT11. Unplug the wire harness from the LT1.2. Plug one end of the LocoNet cable you want to test into the LT1.Note: When making your own LocoNet Cables, it is important to make them in a consistent manner. At Digitrax, the white wire is always on the right side of the plug when the plug is viewed with the clip at the top.3. Connect the other end of the LocoNet Cable being tested to any powered Digitrax Booster’s LocoNet Port A or B. Be sure you have at least one Digitrax throttle plugged in ...

1. Carefully remove the locomotive’s shell from the frame. Notice the orientation of the light board, so that you can install the new decoder in the same orientation. 2. Carefully remove the factory light board by sliding it toward the back of the locomotive and out from under the frame clips. Then gently lift the board out of the frame. Be careful not to bend the motor contacts. Apply a small piece of Kapton tape to saddle area of the frame above motor. 3. Install the DN163K2 decoder by angeling it slightly as you insert the front corners into the forward ...

Photo Courtesy Kato, USA Installation Instructions: The DN143K2 cannot be tested prior to installation in the rail diesel car. 1. Carefully remove the shell from the RDC. Carefully remove the plastic casting from the bottom side of the RDC frame, using a flat bladed screwdriver to pry it loose. 2. Gently remove the white clip that holds the seat panel in place. Remove the seat panel by pushing up gently from the bottom of the frame. The seat panel has clips underneath that are very easy to break, so be careful. 3. Take extra care to notice how the RDC ...

1. Carefully remove the locomotive's shell from the frame. Notice the orientation of the circuit board inside so that you can install the decoder in the same orientation. (Figure 1) 2. Remove the 10 black plastic plugs from the lightboard that secure the wires to the PCB. There are 4 plugs (retainers) on each end and 2 on the side for the motor connection. Remove the red and black wires, carefully noting where each wire originally connected to the PCB. Remove the lightboard itself by pinching the black plastic release tabs and pulling the board up and off of the ...

Q: What is the basic configuration and OpSw settings for a section of the PM42 when configured for circuit breaker control? A:  The PM42 is a 4 section multi-purpose device where each of the four sections can be individually configured to act as either a circuit breaker, or automatic reverse loop controller. The PM42 monitors the current flow to the rails and interrupts the connection when it senses that the current demands exceed the upper allowable current level determined by the User controllable Option Switch (OpSw) settings. The power flow of a layout's command control system starts with the command station, or ...

1. Plug the DT402 series throttle into any functioning Digitrax LocoNet System or other LocoNet compatible system and you are ready to get started! You can use any LocoNet jack on your system. 2. After you plug the DT402 into your LocoNet, you will briefly see the DT402 splash screen: This screen shows the throttle type: DT402I, DT402R or DT402D and software version number. It is displayed for a few seconds each time you power on the DT402. 3. The DT402D will then momentarily display the Duplex Group name and radio Channel. 4. Next you will see the power indicator ...

Q:  I'm wanting to know how to MU two locomotives together that are in a tail to tail configuration. I know that this can be easily done with a DT400 or DT402 throttle but not sure how to do it with the Zephyr. A:  Make sure all the locos in the consist are traveling in the same physical direction on the track (both going to the left or to the right). Remember that "reversing" takes place in the locomotive not on the track, so it is important that the engines be traveling in the same direction when they are MU'd.  ...

To select and run a DCC equipped locomotive with a known address follow these steps:1. Set the DCS50's Throttle Knob [1] to STOP. 2. Place a DCC equipped locomotive (one with a decoder installed) on your digital layout that is controlled by your DCS50. In this example we assume that you have a new Digitrax decoder that is factory programmed to address 03. If your decoder is using a different address, simply use that address as you follow these instructions.3. Check the DCS50's Track Status Indicator Dot [4] to be sure that track power is turned on. Press the POWER ...

The image above shows the “M-10000 Coach Car B” for the N scale Con-Cor M-10000, which is the 1st car behind the loco. If you look closely, you can see the holes in the underbody, above which a speaker can be mounted for a sound decoder installation. The recommended Digitrax sound decoder would be the Digitrax SFX0416, but to use this decoder, one or more of the seat sections as shown below will need to be removed. There is a pocket that is designed for a speaker above the underbelly and under the center section of seats. The speaker that comes with ...

Q: What is RoHS? A: The RoHS Directive stands for "the restriction of the use of certain hazardous substances in electrical and electronic equipment". This Directive bans the placing on the EU market of new electrical and electronic equipment containing more than agreed levels of lead, cadmium, mercury, hexavalent chromium, polybrominated biphenyl (PBB) and polybrominated diphenyl ether (PBDE) flame retardants. Q: When did the directive become effective in the EU? A: July 1, 2006 Q: How does this affect products shipped to countries outside the EU? A: The United States and Canada have not yet instituted RoHS as of January ...

Preparation 1. Carefully remove the locomotive's shell from the frame. Note the orientation for proper reinstallation. (Figure 1) 2. Remove the four track power pickup wires clipped to the lightboard (2 on each side) (Figure 2) Carefully pull the brass motor clips from under the track power "staples" on the lightboard. 3. Unscrew the lightboard screws to release PCB from the frame. Decoder Board Installation 4. Physically secure the DH165K0 decoder PCB with the lightboard screws. 5. Attach the four track power pickup wires by shortening and stripping each wire (2 on each end) and soldering these wires to each ...

I have an extensive collection of older (15-20 years) Z-Scale Maerklin equipment. Can I convert the locos to Digitrax, or must I buy some other brand of loco to use Digitrax? Maybe yes, maybe no. It depends upon the size of the locomotive. We are aware of several European Z-Scale model railroads that use Digitrax. We also know of a very large Z-Scale railroad in Washington, DC that uses Digitrax. This particular railroad is a model of Swiss prototype, so the locomotives are all electric-types; there seems to be enough room inside for a decoder, especially the new DZ125 series ...

LocoNet is a peer-to-peer local area network, a communication network that is similar to communication networks used in today’s computer industry. There are five types of computer network topologies: star, bus, tree, freeform and ring.  The only prohibited configuration for LocoNet is the ring.  LocoNet should never be looped back on itself.Note: In the diagrams below, CS represents a Digitrax Command Station and the M represents any LocoNet compatible module or device.1.  The Star Topology is where all devices are connected to a central hub by individual legs. 2.  The Bus (Daisy Chain) Topology is where all devices are connected to ...

The DS51K1 is designed specifically for Kato N-Scale turnouts.  Kato manufactures both a #4 and #6 turnout; one DS51K1 will control one Kato turnout solenoid.  In cases where there are two turnouts in a crossover track arrangement, you must use two DS51K1s, each assigned to the same address.Installation of the four decoder wires requires soldering skills.  And, just to make things interesting, Kato uses the colors of black and red for their turnout control wires, while Digitrax uses black and red for the power and data bus.  You will make four connections, two connected to the turnout motor and two ...

Current production Digitrax decoders use the following numbering system: The first character means that it is a digital decoder. This is always a “D”. The second character indicates the decoder’s physical size. This is based on the smallest "scale" the decoder is designed to fit. This will be a Z, N, H, or G. The third character is the current rating of the decoder. This will be a 1, 2, 3, 4 or 5. We designate 1.25 & 1.5 amp decoders as 1s and 3.5 amp decoders as 3s for simplicity. The fourth character indicates how many functions, including directional ...

Note: Upgrading to Digitrax from Lenz doesn't have to mean purchasing all new equipment! This app note shows you how to salvage some of your Lenz equipment when you move up to Digitrax!

  What is the difference between programing on the layout using Track A and B and using a dedicated programing track using Pgm A & B. Is there a difference in voltage, packets, protocol between the two? Programming Track Broadcast programming, also called service mode programming, uses a programming track. The programming track is electrically separate from the rest of the railroad, and is connected to the "PROG A" and "PROG B" terminals of your DCS100/200 or Zephyr (Xtra) command station.One major advantage to a programming track is that many systems can read-back the Configuration Variables (CV's) that are in ...

Connecting BD1 to a DS54, DS64 and SE8c? The BD1, block occupancy detector (replaced in 2004 by the BD4) was designed as an add-on device, which took advantage of the block occupancy message generating (over the LocoNet) capabilities of the DS54. The BD1 is also compatible, for the same purpose, with the DS64 and SE8c. The following diagrams indicated how to connect the BD1 to the rails, rail power source, and the Digitrax DS54, DS64 and SE8c.  Note: The wires that connect the BD1 to the rails and rail power source are characterized as two heavy, uninsulated, and polarity neutral wires.

Can I combine the power input requirements for PM42's with other units for economy?Digitrax recommends each PM42 module to have its own seperate power source. The criteria for choosing a power supply for the PM42 is any power source that can deliver 12-15V AC or 13.8-15V DC with a minimum of 125 ma. The Digitrax PS14 meets the minimum power requirement of a PM42.It is possible to power more than one PM42 from a single power source. When powering multiple PM42's special care must be taken to insure identically phasing of all PM42's and ample current availability to power all ...

DN163A0 is a board replacement decoder for Atlas N-Scale GP40-2, GP38 U25B, SD35, Trainmaster, B23-7 and several others. Shown here is an installation in a GP40-2. 1. Carefully remove the locomotive’s shell from the frame. Notice the orientation of the light board inside so that you can install the decoder in the same orientation. 2. Carefully remove the plastic light shroud at the front of the loco and loosen the frame screws enough to allow the removal of the light board. Lift the board out of the frame. 3. Install the decoder, square CPU to the top, between the frame ...

There was a time when every mobile decoder installation was a custom installation. In those early days, we were just feeling our way along, trying to find ways to make the existing supply of decoders fit into locomotives which had been designed in a different era. Fortunately, things have changed along the way, and in many cases, the Digitrax Decoder Selection Guide will list your locomotive. But many locomotives are not listed because they are too new or are too generic for a special listing. So, from time to time, you will have to "wing it" just a bit to ...

The DT300 is “InfraReady”. The DT300R can operate tetherless on radio or “infraReady.” Both units are also provided with a cable to attach into LocoNet when required. A 9 volt battery must be used to power both the DT300 and DT300R for tetherless operation. Using DT300 as a tetherless throttle is easy:1. For Infrared operation, plug in at least one Digitrax IR receiver (UR90 or UR91) to your working LocoNet. Because infrared signals are line of sight, more than one receiver may be necessary for optimal performance in your layout room. 2. For Radio operation, plug in at least one ...

Q:  I just purchased a used Digitrax set consisting of a DB150, UT2 and a PS515 for a very low price. What do I need to add to bring this up to current standards? A:  Because of Digitrax LocoNet, it is easy to add the latest components to upgrade on older starter set.  What you purchased was originally called a Genesis Starter Set.  The PS515 did not come with it but it is the perfect power supply for the DB150.   Your next step depends on what you want to do with your railroad.  In this case, the components you have will be ...

The Kelana Jaya Rail Line model is a DCC intense layout, using many Digitrax command control components to achieve the goal of training operators of the actual rail line. The railroad was built in the 1990's and many of the Digitrax devices used for the Kelana Jaya Rail Line model have been superseded with improved units. Components used for the Kelana Jaya layout: 28 Mainline turnouts 11 Yard turnouts 39 Tortoise switch machines 84 Dwarf signals (yellow/green, red/green, red/yellow) 38 Mainline block signals 38 Heavy duty SPDT switch relays Digitrax Components Used for the Kelana Jaya layout: 1 DCS 100 ...

I have a 4x8 H0 scale layout.  I'm 13 years old and REALLY thinking about switching to DCC, I need to know really fast because I want to ask my parents to get it for Christmas.You wouldn't know by looking at those who edit the Tech Support Depot, but there actually was a time when we too were thirteen, and just starting out in model railroading.  In many ways, we still are thirteen years old; we just can't move as fast.  Consider this photograph from our youth: This little bit of ancient model railroad history dates back to the 1950's, ...

Direct Home Wiring: A wiring system where the DCC booster powers each rail via an individual wire.  Each booster is wired to it's own track power section and there is no electrical connection between boosters. This means that each power district is double gapped and is connected to it's own booster.  The boosters are in turn connected via LocoNet to the command station providing one source of commands for the entire layout.Digitrax recommends using only Direct Home Wiring for all Digitrax layouts. Non command control layouts typically use common rail wiring as part of their control method. This means that one rail ...

BD4 Output Each BD4 is situated between the PM42 Power Manager and the railroad. The DCC signal passes from the DCS50 Zephyr, through the Power Manager, through the BD4 to the track to the locomotive. When a locomotive (or equipped car) is present in a track segment, the BD4 also sends out occupancy information, in two ways. Occupancy Information Output LED1 The LED1 10-pin header is for testing the status of power to the rails and block occupancy with the LED indicator which is included with the BD4. The LED1 can also be used for panel indicator lights using LED's. ...

  There are two methods of providing power to the DS54: from the rails and from an auxiliary power source. The DS54 can be powered from the rails however, Digitrax strongly recommens that the DS54 be powered from an auxiliary power supply capable of delivering 12-16 volts (ac or dc) at 300 millamperes for best results.  Powering the DS54 from the rails reduces the current available to power locomotives and lighted rolling stock.  The auxiliary power supply connections are the red (+) and black (-) wires. Note: Digitrax recommends the PS14 Power Supply for independently powered DS54’s. Multiple DS54’s can be powered from a single power ...

What is an LnWi? The Digitrax LnWi module is a 2.4GHz IEEE 802.11 b/g/n (Wifi) Wireless Access Point type of device that logically bridges access from compatible external throttle APP(s) running on mobile tablet or smart phones onto a Digitrax LocoNet. The LnWi is an independent method for Digitrax users to control locomotives, and can be used at the same time as e.g. Digitrax Duplex or Simplex Wireless, and IR/wired throttles and other Wifi LocoNet access devices on the same system it is wired to. The design goal for the LnWi was to make it very easy for a Digitrax user ...

Application Note: Con-Cor HO-Scale Zephyr steps needed for the DZ125PS decoder installation Step 1: Carefully remove the body from the frame. There are four clips along each side of the body. (See red arrows) We have found if you start at the rear of the body with a small flathead screwdriver and carefully pry the body outward to remove the back clip, you can move the screwdriver forward to release the others. Once the body is completely removed, carefully lift the light board from its holders on the bulkheads. (See blue arrows) Be very careful as the pins that hold ...

1. Plug the DT402 & DT400 series throttle into any functioning Digitrax LocoNet System or other LocoNet compatible system and you are ready to go! You can use any LocoNet jack on your system.2. First, you will see the DT402 or DT400 version number screen: This screen shows the throttle's software version number. It is displayed for a few seconds each time you power on the throttle.3. Next you will see the power indicator screen: This screen indicates the power available to the throttle. When you are plugged in to LocoNet, this value will be between 9 & 15 volts. When you ...

When I hook up my USB cable to my PC the DCS240’s blue USB led turns on, but Digitrax DigiIPL II, LocoMon and SoundLoader II utilities do nothing when opened. What is the problem? The blue USB led lit on the DCS240 means that the complex USB Enumeration and startup sequence has successfully completed.  Be sure to select the correct COM port number that is now associated with this DCS240 in the software you are trying to use.  You can see this COM number appear in the “Ports (COM & LPT)” entries of e.g. the Device Manager function of Windows, ...

There is a numeric keypad on the DT402/DT400 throttle.  The numeric keys on the keypad are primarily related to the throttle mode shown in the LCD’s mode indicator area, but can be used for numeric entry and function control in other modes. For example, when the command station is in the Function Mode Fn, the numeric keys are used for function control. When the command station is in the Locomotive Mode,Lo, the numeric keys are used to enter loco addresses. When the command station is in the Switch Mode is Sw, the numeric keys are used to enter switch addresses.In ...

DH165L0 fits Life-Like GP7, SD60 and many other locos with Life-Like DCC medium plug arrangement. 1. Remove locomotive shell, noting the orientation of the circuit board inside. (See Figure 1) 2. Unplug the the manufacturer’s DCC socket from the pins on the factory board. Remove the two screws that hold the board in place. (See Figure 2) Lift out the factory board and save the two screws for future use. 3. Insert the locomotive’s DCC socket onto the pins on the Digitrax DH165L0 decoder board. In this orientation, Pin 1 (the orange wire) is the lower left pin and Pin ...

The DH165Q1 fits many Atlas, Intermountain, Life-Like & Other factory sound equipped HO locomotives. Installation Instructions - Intermountain F7 example: Removing Locomotive Shell and Disconnecting Lightboard 1. Carefully remove the front coupler and then the locomotive's shell from the frame. Note the orientation for proper reinstallation. 2. Unplug and mark the two track power pickup 2-pin plugs, the motor 2-pin plug and the 6-pin headlight plug(Figure 1) Observe and carefully note the original wire locations! One of the track power plugs and the 2 pin motor plug can be inadvertently swapped when hooking up the new decoder PCB. 3. Unscrew ...

DCS50 Zephyr - Quick Start Guide 1. Unpacking Your ZephyrUnpack your box and locate the DCS50 Command Station and the PS315 power supply. 2. Before You BeginBefore proceeding to the next step, make sure the Throttle Knob is turned all the way to “STOP” and the Direction/ Brake lever is set to “BRAKE”. 3. Connecting the Pieces TogetherOn the back of the DCS50, locate the gray screw terminal strip. On this strip, locate the two terminals labeled “RAIL A” and “RAIL B”. Attach your layout track wires to these terminals. It does not matter which is which. 4. Turn on ...

The first Digitrax system to use LocoNet was Big Boy. Each Big Boy system came with a LocoNet Adapter 1 (LA1) or LocoNet Adapter 2 (LA2). Documentation for these units was minimal, but is included here. LA1 LA-1 came with a simple card: LA-1 LocoNet Adapter Use this cable to connect your DB100 to your DT200 command station unit and to your LocoNet command bus. The LA-1 allows you to connect more than one throttle to your Big Boy System. You only need one LA-1 in a Big Boy System. If you are upgrading to Big Boy from Challenger, you ...

1. Strip the insulation from the red, green, black and yellow wires on the harness. The blue and white wires are not used and may be cut off the harness if you wish.2. Twist the red and yellow wires together. Twist the black and green wires together. 3. To test motor operation, hook up the wires according to the directions in the Digitrax Decoder Manual. One of the two center LEDs will light as the motor voltage increases from the decoder. Change direction and the other LED will light. 4. To test other decoder functions connect the LT-1 to the ...

Kato N-Scale GG1 steps needed for the DN163K1D decoder Carefully remove the locomotive’s shell and light board retainer from the frame. Notice the orientation of the light board inside so that you can install the new decoder in the same orientation. Carefully remove the factory light board by sliding it toward the back of the locomotive and out from under the forward frame notches. Then gently lift the board out of the frame. Be careful not to bend or damage the motor tabs. Carefully remove the motor tabs from the factory lightboard. The motor tabs attach to the board with ...

1. Be sure that only the locomotive you want to program is on the programming track.2. Press the PROG key on the DCS50 to enter programming mode. The DCS50 will display one of the programming modes available. Digitrax recommends the Paged Mode when you are using the programming track. If you press the PROG key repeatedly, you will cycle through the following choices: PAGE   PHYS   dir   OPS For example, to use Paged mode stop pressing the PROG key when the following screen appears:Each time you press the LOCO key the display will toggle between Ad2 and Ad4. ...

The DN163A1 is a board replacement decoder for Atlas N-Scale SD60, SD60M, SD50 and others. 1. Carefully remove the locomotive’s shell from the frame. Notice the orientation of the light board inside so that you can install the decoder in the same orientation. 2. Carefully remove the plastic light shroud at the front of the loco and loosen the frame screws enough to allow the removal of the light board. Lift the board out of the frame. 3. Install the decoder, between the frame halves as shown. The narrow part of the decoder fits between the frame with the frame ...

As technology has advanced so have Digitrax throttles.  In the early days, it was not possible for the throttles to display decimal notation so hexadecimal was used.  The downside to hex notation is that you need to use a conversion table or a formula to determine the hex value to use for CV programming.  As better components and CPUs became available, we were able to move to the more user friendly decimal notation that you see in today's Digitrax throttles.  The move to decimal notation made DCC much easier to understand for everyone.  All current Digitrax throttles use only decimal notation for ...

The MS100 LocoNet Interface is a serial device that connects LocoNet to a computer via a 25pin serial port.This application note shows how you can use your Digitrax MS100 computer interface with the USB Port on your computer.  Serial ports are not available on most computers in current production. USB ports are more widely used today.  The Digitrax MS100 LocoNet interface can be connected to a USB port by using a USB to Serial RS-232 DB-25 Adapter Cable.  Digitrax recommends the PR3 for interfacing your USB equipped computer with LocoNet.Caution: Not all cables on the market will work. One that ...

How can I remotely monitor the input and output status of a section of the PM42 that is configured to act as a circuit breaker at a remote location? The final output stage, of each section, of the PM4 or PM42 is a DPDT relay. The contacts of this relay act in a similar fashion as the contacts of a DPDT toggle switch. These inputs and outputs can be monitored in a variety of ways. Three common monitoring devices are a LED (with appropriate resistor), a lamp (of the appropriate voltage), or an optical coupler (with appropriate resistor). The following ...

Digitrax decoders allow for operation on both Digital Command Control (DCC) powered and on traditional Direct Current (DC) powered model railroads.  Decoders from other manufacturers may or may not have this featureModern Digitrax Decoders are shipped with analog functions enabled to allow you to have working functions on locos on either type of layout without changing any CV values.  (Series 3 decoders and later) When a Digitrax Series decoder with analog functions enabled moves from a DCC track section to an analog track section, the functions that were active on DCC will remain active on DC.  For these decoders, CV13 is ...

DT400R is a radio equipped throttle. To use your DT400R as a radio throttle, you will need to install a radio receiver on your layout. All DT400s are “InfraReady.” This means that your DT400 comes with IR LEDs that will send infrared signals to the layout. To use this InfraReady capability, you just need to install one or more infrared receivers on your layout. A 9 volt battery must be used to power the DT400/R for tetherless operation. Using DT400/R as a tetherless throttle is easy: 1. For Infrared operation, plug in at least one Digitrax IR receiver (UR90 or ...

Installation of the SFX004/SFX006 SoundBugs into a DH165-Series decoder is easy, but it does require some care. The SoundBug must be properly oriented to the decoder. Here, the DH165L0: Here, an installation in a Proto1000 DL-109. In this orientation, the SoundBug sockets are to the right on the DH165L0 decoder: The SoundBug is plugged into the sockets of the DH165L0 decoder: Because the DL-109 is a diesel locomotive, it will not need the white synchronization wire. Everything is fitted into place. The SoundBug is shipped with a small piece of foam to protect the pins of this decoder. You may ...

Switch Mode is used for sending commands to accessory decoders and for changing Option Switches (OpSw) in your DCS50. The most common use of switch mode is for operating turnouts (track switches).To change the position of a turnout:This note assumes that you have already installed and programmed turnouts and turnout decoders on your layout.  Each turnout is connected to a stationary decoder that controls the operation of that turnout.  There are several different stationary decoders for this purpose such as DS64 and others.  Please see the related articles below.1. Press the SWITCH Key. 2. The last switch address selected by ...

Here at the Tech Support Depot, it has been our goal to improve operators' understanding of the Digitrax system of model railroad command control. We often see thoughtful words from others who are not employed by Digitrax that still have an in-depth understanding of the product line. Here, Doug Stuard talks about the UR91; these words originally appeared on the Yahoo Groups Digitrax discussion list, and are used here with his kind permission. UR91 and Throttle Antenna The UR91 antenna is the pair of 3" wires that sprout from the PC board that are arranged in a "V" similar to ...

When your throttle is not in use, we recommend that you store the throttle by removing the battery and putting it back in the battery compartment with the polarity reversed. Be careful here, see Diagram 4 for proper orientation. Although this example is for the DT400, the same caution applies to all other Digitrax throttles. When the battery is placed in the incorrect orientation, the battery terminals short out against the battery tensioning spring (on left), causing the battery to rapidly discharge and get very hot in the process. Correct: Incorrect:

The DCS50 Zephyr displays three types of error messages: Short circuit shutdown occurs when the DCS50 detects a short circuit in the power district where it is connected to the layout. This can be a loco that has derailed or picked a switch or some other conductive material lying across the tracks. In this case you will see “o”s walking across the display from left to right. Once the short is cleared, the DCS50 will resume normal operations. Current overload occurs when the DCS50 has reached its 2.5 Amp current limit. In this case you should run fewer locomotives or ...

What is it and how do I find a DPDT?It's an electrical switch; double pole - double throw (DPDT). Here is a schematic of a DPDT: More typically, they look like this: The DPDT is very common to model railroading and found at just about any store that sells electronics.  It comes in a variety of arrangements, with the most common being a DPDT Center-Off switch.  Analog OperationsIn the early days of Direct Current model railroading, reverse loops had to be controlled by hand, and the DPDT was perfect for the job.  The DPDT was wired in such a way ...

BDL168 Pin Out Configuration: Notes: 1) All connector pins are paired top (component side of the BDL168) and bottom (solder side of the BDL168) except 11/M and 12/N. For 6 Amp current rating with 3 Amp connector pins, track/zone wires must be connected to both pin pairs: e.g. Zone A = pins 1 & A (See Figure below): 2) Letters G, I, O & Q are not used as pin designations on the connector. 3) Power connections should be made to a power supply dedicated to BDL168 use only. Multiple BDL168 units can be supplied by a single shared supply ...

Fred Miller has been an invaluable resource for information about Digitrax sound. Here are some of his thoughts about the sound project files, from the Yahoo Digitrax Sound discussion group: There seems to be confusion over what is a SPJ.  Yahoo closed down all Groups in 2019.  The information is still relevant.   Fred Miller has also written a program called SPJHelper which easily lets you create/modifiy Sound Projects. There are additional Sound Projects on Groups.io - Look for AnPRR owned by John McMasters.  He creates many SPJ Sound Projects.   It is not surprising since it is a very ...

'It is possible to operate one conventional DC locomotive at Address 00.  In many cases, this is the first locomotive that beginners use when they first get their command control system.  In other cases, this locomotive is one which cannot be easily converted to DCC.  Regardless, although it is possible to use your Digitrax system in this way, it is not a recommended approach.1. Place an analog locomotive (one without a decoder) on your layout.  While the analog loco is sitting still, you will hear the characteristic “singing” caused by the DCC track signal when it is applied to analog ...

Decoder Installation instructions?? is this included in the PDF for this decoder or is it a stand alone decoder installation app note?  Z.1. Carefully remove the locomotive’s shell from the frame. 2. Carefully remove the plastic plug that retains the brass motor clips and bend the brass motor clips up and away from the circuit board. 3. Slide the circuit board forward to release it from the clip on the locomotive frame and lift the board off the frame. 4. Gently lift up (about 3 or 4 mm) the brass pickup rail from one side of the locomotive, being careful ...

1. Carefully remove the locomotive's shell from the frame. Notice the orientation of the shell for reinstallation. 2. Carefully remove the plastic light shroud by gently prying up the tabs on either side of the frame and lifting the plastic piece off the frame. 3. Slide the factory light board forward to release it from under the clips on the locomotive frame. Be careful not to distort the frame clips as you slide and lift the light board off the frame. 4. Place the small piece of kapton tape provided with the decoder on the loco frame, wrapping it around ...

Digitrax Command Stations offer three methods of multiple unit (MU) or consist control:1. Basic Consisting2. Advanced Consisting3. Universal Consisting (the Digitrax preferred method) By definition, Digitrax always adds loco addresses to the “TOP” loco address in a consist.   The “TOP” loco is special, in that it is the address that receives the speed & direction commands for the entire consist.   All non TOP loco addresses added to the consist are controlled by commands sent to the “TOP” loco.   The TOP locomotive does not have to be a physical loco on the track, it can be a phantom. ...

The ability of a variety Digitrax throttles to work together on layout equipped with a variety of wireless technologies is part of the beauty of LocoNet.  With LocoNet, it is simple to add components to the system and have all of them work together. Digitrax infrared throttles will operate on any layout equipped with UR90 infrared receivers, UR91 simplex receivers and/or UR92 duplex transceivers.  All of these panels are equipped with infrared receivers.  All current model Digitrax throttles have infrared emitters that will work wirelessly with any panel that has an infrared receiver.  All current Digitrax throttles can also be used ...

The two "POWER IN" terminals on all Digitrax boosters & command stations are the power input connections. Digitrax recommends the PS514 to power the DC200 and DB150.  Set the voltage setting on the PS514 to 16.8v or 19v.  The PS2012 can also be used to power the DCS100 and DB150.  The "Y" cable provided with the PS2012 has an embedded 5 amp current protection.  The PS2012 can also be used to power the DCS200.  The "Y" cable is not suitable for use with the DCS200 since it has an 8 amp. output. When powering your layout, make sure that all polarities and ...

Q: I read in the February 2008 "Scale Rails" on page 11 that I need to add some "High Frequency Filter" gizmos on my layout to make my trains run properly. I have been using Digitrax equipment for 12 years, do I need to make these changes? A: We do not feel that this is necessary. With modern, well designed decoders, almost any combination of transmission-line ringing and other mismatch effects described in this article are completely filtered and ignored by the decoder. This is a superior solution rather than trying to design filters for unpredictable limiting cases of wiring ...

What do I need for DCC control of a Walters Cornerstone Swing bridge? Image Courtesy Wm. K. Walthers We do not have any direct experience with this particular bridge but after a little research, this is what we recommend.The instruction sheet which comes with the 933-1050 Motorizing Kit is quite vague.  "The unit runs on DC power.  Hook the wires up to the DC contacts on a transformer with a maximum voltage of 12.  If you hook it up to a variable speed transformer, do not exceed 12 volts.  The gear ratio is 320:1."  That said, it is still a ...

Direct Home Layout Wiring Digitrax strongly recommends direct home wiring where each power district and its booster are electrically isolated. This method of wiring has safety advantages and makes troubleshooting problems easier. In addition, direct home wiring makes detection work more prototypically. With direct home wiring, the BDL168 can determine and indicate whether any of its 4 zones is powered or not (possibly short-circuited) even when there is nothing on the rails in the detection sections. The BDL168 factory-set logic causes the detection sections to show "occupied" if the associated zone's power is off (because in this case, detection is ...

Background The world is filled with places like Nemo Junction, a crossing between two railroads which is protected by a signal interlocking plant that also serves as an interchange point between these railroads. Cars destined for places to and from another railroad are exchanged at places like these. The interchange has been described as being the ideal model railroad industry because any type of car can be found there, heading toward places that are not on the model railroad itself. Nemo Junction is based upon a real place, a location in Illinois identified on the timetable of the Santa Fe ...

Running the PR3 and PR3 Xtra with JMRI on MAX OS X. 1) Plug in the Digitrax PR3 to a USB port on an Intel-based Apple computer running MAC OS version 10.5 or later.  Within about a second the Green "USB" led on the PR3 should glow steady green showing a USB connection has been established with the MAC. 2) Open system profiler or About This Mac and under hardware>USB there should be a entry "Vcom" showing that the USB port has enumerated OK. This optional step is simply to check the PR3 device was found.3) Go to JMRI sourceforge ...

Operations mode (OPs mode) programming allows you to program decoders on the layout instead of having to move them to a separate programming track.  This is a write only programming method.  If you want to be able to read back the values written to a particular decoder using Ops Mode programming, you will need to install transponding on the layout.  If transponding is not active on the layout, you must use an isolated programming track for reading back CV values.The extent of the area with OPs Mode readback available depends on how muchof the layout is instrumented for transponding. The ...

Program the TF4's Address & Function Outputs1. Before using your TF4, set its address. This may or may not be the same address as a mobile decoder already installed in the loco or car depending on how you are planning to use the TF4. In the case of TF4's being used as a stand alone transponder or as a function decoder, choose an address that is not the same as another mobile decoder address in use on the layout.2. Connect the RED & BLACK wires of the TF4 to a service mode DCC programmer and program the TF4's address as ...

There are many different CVs that have been defined to control operating characteristics of your locomotives. Your decoder manual has a complete listing of CVs that are available with specific decoders, what they do and suggested values for each CV. Programming these CVs is simple:1. Be sure that only the locomotive you want to program is on the programming track.2. Press the PROG Key to enter programming mode. The DCS50 will display one of the programming modes available. Digitrax recommends the Paged Mode when you are using the programming track. As you press the PROG Key repeatedly, you will cycle ...

Q:  How can the DS54 be configured to control a Flashing Crossing Signal? A:  The elements necessary to create a simple function flashing/blinking crossing signal are: a block occupancy detection (trigger) device, an electronic flashing/blinking circuit (DS54) and a crossing signal. The DS54 can accommodate two different types of triggering devices: Digitrax block occupancy devices (BD1 and BD4) and third party block occupancy devices (such as magnets and reed contacts). The following drawings indicate how to connect the two different types of triggering devices, along with the crossing signal, to the DS54. The upper drawing is for the BD1 or ...

DT400 is designed to maintain a close similarity in function & feel with Digitrax DT300, DT200, & DT100 series throttles. This family resemblance makes it easy to add new throttles to your Digitrax Command Control System and be able to use them in ways similar to the existing throttles that you are already used to. DT400 can be used with any Digitrax LocoNet System or other LocoNet compatible DCC system.   User friendly Multi-line Backlit LCD with easy to read icons and messages.   Prompts in the display guide you every step of the way. To make operation easy and ...

DCC Automatic Reversing SectionsVirtually all automatic reversing will fall into 3 categories with the wiring principles for all being the same:1. Reverse Loops2. Wyes3. TurntablesDCC has the ability to automatically reverse sections of track we call Reversing Sections while our trains are running and not affect the direction or speed of the trains. This is because we put a constant square wave AC current on the track and control the trains (locos) by sending messages to them (actually to receivers we call decoders) to tell them what to do such as start, stop, change directions, etc. . We are thus ...

The Athearn N-Scale P59PHI was not designed for a plug 'n play or board replacement installation therefore, a wired installation will be necessary. This installation is straightforward if you follow the instructions provided below. There is plenty of room inside the locomotive for this installation. See the Digitrax Decoder Selector on our home page to determine which current production decoder is recommended for this installation. Athearn N-Scale P59PHI Installation Instructions for Digitrax Decoders:1. Remove the locomotive's shell. Note which end of the frame is the front and which is the back.2. Remove the light board that is installed on the ...

The TSMK, Terminal Strip Mounting Kit, includes 2 terminal strip boards with resistors for easy installation. The Digitrax Terminal Strip Mounting Kit makes it simple to connect any scale or model signal to the Digitrax signaling system without soldering. Simply connect the wires from the signal to the TSMK’s screw terminals and plug it in to the SE8C’s Signal Driver Cable. Using the Terminal Strip circuit boards You can attach any of a variety of types of model signal masts in any scale you choose to the Terminal Strip Mounting Kit. The Terminal Strip Mounting Kit has 10 screw terminals ...

When the PR3 is powered up and properly operating, the green ‘USB’ light on the PR3’s control panel will be blinking steadily and the red ‘STAT’ will be blinking momentarily. Make sure the supplied SoundLoader Installation CD is inserted in your PC's CD player. Plug the PR3’s USB cable into a vacant USB socket on your PC . Depending on which operating system you have on your PC, you will next see a dialog box appear on your PC’s monitor. The procedure we document in the following pages is for Windows XP, if you have Windows Vista®, Windows 2000®, or ...

The 5 Amp DCS100 and the 8 Amp DCS200 share the same front panel layout. There is a variety of indicators, switches and connectors: Power Input The two POWER IN terminals on all Digitrax boosters & command stations are the power input connections. Power On Indicator This green LED indicates that the power to the DCS100 is on. Ground Terminal The terminal marked ground provides electrical safety features and an RF ground reference for minimum radiated noise. This should be the ONLY point of any DCS100 installation that is connected to the AC safety ground pin provided on most 3 ...

Application Note: Steps needed for installing the DN143IP mobile decoder into the Con-Cor N-Scale Aerotrain "DCC Car". The image above shows the “DCC Car” for the N scale Con-Cor Aerotrain, which is the 1st car behind the loco. It shows the holes in the underbody, above which a speaker can be mounted for a sound decoder installation. The recommended Digitrax sound decoder would be our SFX0416, but to use this decoder the seats will need to be removed. There is a pocket that is 16mm wide, 36mm long and 3mm deep designed for a speaker above the underbelly and under ...

As originally conceived, the Texas & Southwestern was set up with a very simple DCC system. The railroad uses a DCS50 Zephyr as its command station and booster. The Zephyr is connected to a central power bus, and all tracks, stationary turnout decoders and the automated reverse loop unit are connected to it. Likewise, the LocoNet connections are a series of simple cable connections starting at the Zephyr and ending at the last Universal Panel. The T&SW works well with this arrangement, but there are additional devices that will enhance the operation of this railroad. Digitrax PM42 Power Management System ...

There are 1024 different CVs that have been defined to handle many characteristics you might want to use for your locomotives. Your decoder manual has a complete listing of CVs that are available in specific decoders, what they do and suggested values for each CV. 1. Place the decoder equipped locomotive you want to program on the programming track. If you are using operations mode programming, the loco you want to program can be anywhere on the layout but it must have a decoder that is capable of ops mode programming installed. 2. Enter Program Mode by pressing the PROG ...

DN163K0b Installation Instructions for Kato F-3, F-71. Carefully remove the locomotive’s shell from the frame. 2. Remove the black plastic cab seat panel by gently pressing in at the sides. 3. Carefully remove the plastic plug that retains the brass motor clips and bend the brass motor clips up and away from the circuit board. 4. Slide the circuit board forward to release it from the clip on the locomotive frame and lift the board off the frame. 5. Remove the brass pickup rail from one side of the locomotive, being careful not to bend it. Wrap a small piece ...

This procedure should be done on an electrically isolated programming track1. Be sure that only the locomotive you want to program is on the programming track.2. Press the PROG key on the DCS50 to enter programming mode. The DCS50 will display one of the programming modes available. Digitrax recommends the Paged Mode when you are using the programming track. If you press the PROG key repeatedly, you will cycle through the following choices:      PAGE     PHYS     dir     OPSFor example, to use Paged mode stop pressing the PROG key when the following screen appears:Each time you press the LOCO key the ...

1. Carefully remove the locomotive's shell from the frame (Figure 1, below). Notice the orientation of the shell to the frame so that you can reinstall correctly. 2. To remove the Atlas MP-15DC standard lightboard you will need to loosen the frame screws as shown in figure #1. After the frame halves are loose enough, the standard light board can easily be removed by moving the light board to one side and tilting the lightboard out. 3. Installation of the DN163A3 decoder is the reverse of the removal sequence. With the frames halves still loosened, slide the DCC decoder into ...

I have a Zephyr and a DT400 throttle. My locos have chips of various manufacture. Is there a method, without dismantling the loco of reading which chip is fitted in it? Well, we can't speak for other manufacturers, but if you take a look at the Digitrax decoder index, you will note that many Digitrax decoders have a Manufacturer's ID of "129". This is found by reading the value of CV#8. Some other manufacturers also use Manufacturer's IDs, and you will need to consult their documentation for this information. Note: CV08 is also used to reset Digitrax Series 3 decoders ...

This list is the same for DCS100 & DCS200 Command Stations.* NOTE: Option Switches 36, 37, 38 & 39 have special instructions.

Q:  Can I set up the DS54 for two-button operation turnout control? A:  Two-button control (one button for setting the points to the main route and the other button for setting the points to the diverging route) is a standard configuration for the control of any turnout.  The following charts indicate operating criteria and CV settings. 

  One major consideration is that the reverse section controlled by the AR1 must be longer than the longest train. It is a common misconception that the AR1 will work with an analog controlled ("DC") locomotive; it will not. The AR1 is meant to be used only in a DCC enviroment. The AR1 coordinates the phasing of the reversing section with that of the mainline (non-reversing) section of the layout.  Because a Digitrax layout can be a complex enviroment with detection and transponding, etc. consult the approriate Digitrax user manuals and the Digitrax Tech Support Depot knowledge base.  

DG583S - Function Outputs 1. Function outputs are rated at 2 Amps each. Do not exceed the decoder’s 5 Amp total output rating. This total includes the motor current and total of all function output currents.2. To use a function output with an inductive(coil) type load, see the Digitrax Decoder Manual for more information to avoid damage to the decoder.3. See the Digitrax Decoder Manual for full details of wiring 12-16V lamps, 1.5V lamps, and LEDs. Lamps that draw more than 80 mA when running require a 22 ohm 1/4 watt resistor in series with the directional light function lead ...

Challenger was Digitrax' first commercially produced system.  It was manufactured from 1993 to 1998.It included:A CT4 analog throttle that controlled 4 addresses.  These were color coded.A DB100 command station/booster.A decoder (either HO or N scale).The CT4 throttle is the only throttle ever manufactured by Digitrax that could not be used on other Digitrax systems.

This needs to be somewhere on the KB launch page  Z Digitrax products are not intended for use by persons under the age of 14.   While every care has been taken to ensure the accuracy of this knowledge base, Digitrax cannot be held responsible for any errors or omissions.   The information contained in this knowledge base is, to the best of our knowledge, true and accurate at the time of publication and is solely for informational purposes.   All information on this site is intended to be accurate, complete and timely. In addition any information or advice given ...

HELP!!!!!!!!If your Zephyr DCS50 display isn't showing you what you expect based on the manual, press the EXIT key to return to normal operating mode. Also make sure that the "Power" is on. Then try the throttle task again. If you think you might have made an inadvertent change to one of the factory settings in either the decoder or the command station, try resetting everything to the factory settings and try the task again. Please see the related articles (below).

Once you have instrumented your layout for transponding, you simply add transponder equipped locomotives and you are ready to go. Digitrax decoders have been shipped with transponding included since 1999.  All current production Digitrax decoders are transponder equipped. Older Digitrax decoders models without transponders and decoders made by other manufacturers can add this capability by installing a transponder such as the TL1 or TF4 to existing DCC locomotive installations.  These transponders also add functions to the loco.

The PM42 was specifically designed to work with Digitrax Direct Home wired layouts. Any system that is configured this way will work with the PM42 with no interoperability issues. For example, CVP uses interoperable booster connections.The PM42 can be used with a DC system if it is hooked up in the negative ground return path, or even a Marklin AC digital (trinary) booster. It is possible for the PM42 to be used with most DCC systems. Digitrax has no control or knowledge of each specific non-Digitrax system and how it may interact with the PM42.

Your DCS50 can read back the CV data values programmed into your decoders. You will use your programming track for reading back CV data values.To read back CV values using a programming track:1. Be sure that only the locomotive you want to read back is on the programming track.2. Press the PROG key to enter programming mode. The Zephyr DCS50 will display one of the programming modes available. Once the mode you want to use is on the screen you can go to step 3.For example, to use Paged mode stop pressing the PROG Key when the following screen appears:3. ...

These simple instructions will help you get up and running quickly. A full description of all controls and technical reference information are included later in this knowledge base. This section assumes that you are using a new set straight out of the box.1. Hook up the wires from the track to the RAIL A & RAIL B terminals on the DCS50. Insert the wire from one rail of the track into the RAIL A terminal on the back of the DCS50. Insert the wire from the other rail of the track into the RAIL B terminal. Turn the screw counter ...

Digitrax decoders with numbers ending in "3" have SuperSonic™. Decoders control the locomotive's speed through Pulse Width Modulation. When these pulses are within the human hearing range, it can cause some buzzing in some locomotives.CV09: SuperSonic™ The SuperSonicTM feature allows you to adjust the PWM (pulse width modulation) frequency of your decoder to reduce the humming noise that is characteristic of the DCC signal. Digitrax decoders that have this feature are shipped with the value set at 000/x00 or maximum PWM. To change this value, you can set any value from 000/x00 (max) to 255/xFF (min). Use of this feature ...

  How to Configure the DS54 for one-button turnout controlThe local buttons, throttle, or any other turnout control device connected to the LocoNet can control the DS54 output when the DS54 is connected to the rails. The following drawings indicate the general wiring schematic for a one-button control of a turnout using either a Dual Coil (upper) or slow motion (lower) switch machine. The following two charts indicate operating criteria and CV settings for one-button turnout control. 

Train detection and the related signaling can be a complicated affair. However, it becomes easier if you analyze things and break them down into their component blocks. The whole idea is to protect trains from each other, regulating their movements by the use of signals which tell train crews what to do or what to expect. Train detection identifies which segments of track are occupied by a train. For the real railroads, track detection sections can be very short (such as at track junctions) or very long (such as in rural environments). Train speed and frequency of trains are also ...

The mode indicator, located at the bottom center of the LCD, shows the DT402’s current mode of operations. The DT402 automatically defaults to the Fn mode and returns to this mode whenever the EXIT Key is pressed. The Mode indicator usually shows what the numeric keys are associated with. For example, in Fn mode, any entry on the numeric keypad will affect functions. In Sw mode, keypad entries will change turnouts and in Lo mode, entries on the keypad will enter loco address numbers, etc. The following table provides a list of the Mode indication displayed, the mode name and ...

When you are finished with your session, you should shut down the DCS50 by turning off power to the system.Shutting Down DCS50 Zephyr1. Bring all locomotives on the layout to a stop by setting set the Throttle Knob for each loco to STOP. 2. Turn track power off: Press the POWER key, the DCS50's Track Status Indicator Dot will go off. The display will briefly display "Po" followed by two characters, the Po means power off, the two characters indicate which software version is installed in the unit. The display will automatically revert to showing the last loco address selected ...

The prototype operation that gains the most from DCC is one of those least frequently modeled today: Rapid transit. Rapid transit consists of streetcars, interurban, subway, elevated or commuter rail track and equipment. The trains are usually very short and intervals between trains are relatively brief. Lots of trains run each hour and many trains are running at the same time. All of this operation is very much like a typical model railroad. Any photograph of a major downtown in the streetcar era will have from two to ten streetcars visible with some only feet apart. Simulating this type of ...

To make the DB200+ an Auto Reversing Booster follow the following steps: 1. Remove input power from the DB200+ by turning off the Input Power Supply. 2. Move the Mode Switch to the center P/R or OP position 3. Restore power to the DB200+ by turning on the Input Power Supply. Use the below diagram as a guide to configuring the DB200+ for Reverse Loops. Please note that for Auto Reverse applications the DB200+'s Mode Switch is set to the center P/R or OP position. Also note the DB200+ connections to the track- the DB200+ track connections are NOT directly ...

Model railroad layout signaling is just as complicated as real railroad signaling. This is an example of how signaling might work on a small oval layout.  Once you understand how the signals work together in a simple setting, you will be better equipped to tackle signaling on your layout. The layout is a simple oval with a passing siding. Here are the locations of the individual signals: This railroad has four Absolute signals, two Dwarf signals and two Permissive signals.The four Absolute signals and two Dwarf signals protect not only the main line & the passing track but also the two turnouts ...

The DigiGroupSetup utility is in a ZIP file which is provided for Digitrax customer convenience and can be downloaded from our downloads page. Read Me Text File with DigiGroupSetup This utility is provided on an as-is basis for users with a Windows based machine configured to work with this software, and the ability to perform the setup and operation tasks detailed below. Techsupport is not configured to diagnose issues related to operating system, hardware, configuration or other possible problem areas that may cause problems with running these utilities. DigiGroupSetup: This program allows convenient Duplex system setup for any UR92 on ...

Installation: Figure 1 shows the general arrangement for connecting one or more LNRP's to configure a LocoNet based system for operation. Note that the LNRP's drive the power and Railsync signals on the "standard" LocoNet cable segments, so each LNRP should have a DC input of +15V to +18V at up to 250mA supplied on the side DC power jack. Note that the shaded cable connections are made from the protected network side connections of the LNRP units to the components that are on the "protected" or high reliability part of the System. The other solid cable connections are the ...

LNWI Security Considerations: Enabling and Customizing WPA2 Security The LNWI has the option of enabling WPA2 security to require a passcode to connect to the LNWI SSID.  The primary purpose of this passcode is to limit access to the LNWI in a public setting.  This is designed to operate in a similar function to the passcode options for Digitrax Duplex Radio. Using an unsecured connection poses minimal threat to LocoNet access as the LNWI only utilizes a limited number of LocoNet commands.  The LNWI does not have access to programming capabilities or other advanced LocoNet capabilities on your layout.  No ...

Only the basic communications protocols are covered by the " Standard" in order to ensure interoperability and backward compatibility with existing systems. The "Standard" defines the signal sent over the rails, the tolerances allowed in its generation, the tolerances that must be accepted by the decoders and the basic communications protocol used to convey information to digital decoders. Recommended Practices cover things like the locomotive sockets and "advanced" decoder features. Manufacturers are free to design and implement DCC hardware and interfaces that make sense for their customers. Manufacturers are also free to define how the DCC packets are handled by their ...

  MU (Multiple Unit) OperationsIt is not uncommon to see two, three or even four diesel locos pulling in consist at the front of a train. Sometimes, there is a locomotive added in the middle of the train or at the end of the train to give “helper service” to the head end locomotives. This is called Multiple Unit Operation or MU operation. With DCC, each locomotive is separately controlled. But in the case of MU'ing we would like to have more than one locomotive address controlled by a single throttle to simplify MU operation.Your DCS50 uses universal consisting to ...

  Q: How can I configure the DS54 for block occupancy detection? A:  Any DS54 input can serve as a block occupancy message generator. All that is necessary is to activate a DS54 input with a device that can detect the presence of a train within a specific area/location. The DS54 input can respond to a number of different block occupancy devices including the BD1, BD4, and isolated contacts. The following drawings indicate two different methods (wiring schematics) for the connection of devices to the DS54. The upper drawing Is for isolated contacts and the lower drawing is for BD1 ...

Athearn Genesis SD70s came factory equipped with a Digitrax designed light board. The board is NOT a DCC decoder. If you want to add a decoder and have alternating ditch lights the following steps are recommended: 1 - Remove locomotive shell; 2 - Remove dummy nine pin plug from wire harness and insert Digitrax DH163D on the harness; 3 - Remove the wires of one of the ditch light bulbs from F1N and F1P and solder them to F2N and F2P; 4 - Program CV51 to 106, CV52 to 107 and CV63 to 40. 5 - Reinstall locomotive shell.F2 on ...

OPS Mode Programming Soundtraxx Tsunami Sound Decoders      This article was originally written for Soundtraxx Tsunami decoders.  It will also work for other manufacturer's sound decoders.   The individual CVs that make up an address will need to be programmed individually. These CVs are AD1, CV17, CV18 and CV29. AD1 is the Primary (short address) Default 03, Acceptable Values 1-127 CV17, CV18 are the two CVs that make up the Extended (long address), Acceptable Values 128 - 9983 CV29 is for Decoder Configuration. Values are 06 for 2-digit and 38 for 4-digit addressing. There are many other values that ...

How to Select and Run a DCC Locomotive Using a DT402 or DT400 Series Throttle 1. Activate the throttle's left throttle knob “L” by turning it a 1/4 turn in either direction or by clicking the throttle knob once. The left side address will begin flashing. If nothing is selected on this throttle it will flash “SEL”.2. Press the LOCO Key. The left side of the display will begin flashing. The illustration above shows the LCD display just after you press the LOCO Key to select an address on the L Throttle when nothing has been selected on that throttle before and ...

Status Editing - a DCC decoder's status can be manually changed by a Digitrax command station at any time the decoder is selectable. Speed steps are the increments of motor voltage that a locomotive's mobile decoder produces. Most DCC decoders can operate in 14, 28 or 128 speed steps. In some cases, older decoders operate only in 14 steps. You also may find that it is better to adjust the number of speed steps used by a particular decoder. Digitrax uses status editing to change how the command station communicates with an individual decoder. Our systems power up with the ...

The following is a list of Digitrax Power Xtenders and the Digitrax Decoders they are compatible with.  Power Xtenders only work with the following Series 6 decoders.  All Power Xtenders are Plug and Play.  Digitrax does not support the use or installation of Power Xtenders on any other decoder not listed below.   PX108-2 & PX112-2 works with:DH126D, DH126PS, DH126PDH166D, DH166PS, DH166PDH126MTDH166MTSDH186MTSDXH186MT This Power Xtender has a 2 pin plug. PX108-6 & PX112-6 works with:SDN136PSSDXN136PS This Power Xtender has a 6 pin harness with 8 ohm Oval 10x18mm speaker. PX108-6f & PX112-6f works with:DN166PS This Power Xtender has a 6 ...

There was an error In the BDL168 Instruction Sheet, Figure 6 on Page 19.  The LT5 diagram was incorrect.  This article shows the correct LT5 Detection Sections.  The current on-line version of the BDL168 Instruction Sheet has been corrected. Each BDL168 comes with an LT5 that will help you with layout wiring and troubleshooting for transponding & detection. The LT5 plugs onto the LED header connections of BDL168 and the LEDs on the LT5 light when detection sections are occupied. The status of power to each zone is also shown. In service, the LT5 is plugged in to one of ...

Flashing ditch lights can be set up with several CV's. Using 1.5 Volt Bulbs or LEDsIf you use 1.5 V bulbs, you must install a current setting resistor with a minimum value of 100 ohms for each bulb.Typically a 560 ohm 1/4 watt resistor works well for a grain of rice bulb and a 250 ohm 1/4 watt resistor works well for a grain of wheat bulb.Lower resistance values will increase the lamp brightness. If you use LED's be sure the polarity is correct when you hook them up & install a current setting resistor for each LED. Typically a ...

We recommend testing your new SE8C prior to installation on your layout. The following testing procedures will help familiarize you with the general operation of the SE8C. Track power needs to be ON, a working LocoNet connection and a throttle or PC running DCC control software. Pre-Installation Set-Up 1. Solder one wire from a 12V AC or 15V DC power supply to Pin 3 and the second wire from the power supply to the Pin C on the 44-Pin edge connector; this powers the SE8C. Digitrax manufactures the PS14, which is appropriate for this installation. Multiple SE8Cs can be powered ...

I am trying to wire my new layout (N gauge) using the DS 64 with Peco switch machine PL10. The PL10 has four wires to be attached. My question is: Do I need to attach all four wires or just one set of wires? The PL-10 is a coil-type switch machine with double solenoids. One solenoid is activated to make the track switch throw in one direction, and the other is activated to throw it in the other direction. All four connections are required, with one for each solenoid being common and the other two being for the individual coils. ...

While tetherless, the DT400/R operates as a one-way transmitter. The DT400/R must be plugged into LocoNet to select an available locomotive address. After an address is selected on your DT400/R, you can unplug from LocoNet and run the selected addresses with infrared or radio. The throttle will automatically convert to infrared or radio operation for all speed, direction, function, operations mode programming, and switch commands. Digitrax uses this safety selection procedure, which requires throttles be plugged into LocoNet to select a loco address to run. This is an important operational safety feature. Digitrax chose not to allow one way address ...

Programming is the process of setting the configuration variables (CVs) in your decoder to the appropriate values that will make the locomotive perform the way you want it to.  The first CVs that most people change are those that set the locomotive decoder's address.  The mobile decoder in your locomotive usually comes pre-porgrammed to a factory default address of "03".  Once you add a second locomotive, you will want to change the this new locomotive to another address.  Not doing so will result in both locomotives operating at the same time when you send commands to address 03.Likewise, there are a ...

Programming On The Mainline: Operations Mode ProgrammingOperations Mode Programming [Ops Mode] lets you program CVs in DCC locomotives equipped with Extended Packet Format decoders while they are on the mainline.  This is handy for situations where you want to make an adjustment to a specific locomotive while it is in service.  There are also situations where mobile decoders from other manufacturers can only be programmed in this manner. A typical use for Ops mode programming would be to change the acceleration rate (CV03) or the deceleration rate (CV04) of your locomotives to simulate the weight and braking capability of the ...

What are the power requirements of a SE8C? Any power supply that can provide 12-15 volts either AC or DC with a minimum current rating of 100 ma is all that is necessary to power a single SE8c. Digitrax recommends the PS14 for powering the SE8c. A single PS14 has the ability to power two SE8c’s. When connecting multiple SE8c’s to a single power source the total maximum current requirement of the power source is computed by multiplying the number of SE8c modules by 100 ma (Example: 3 SE8c’s would require a 300 ma power supply - 3x100=300). The edge ...

1. Before using your TL1, set its address. This may or may not be the same address as a mobile decoder already installed in the loco or car depending on how you are planning to use the TL1. In the case of TL1s being used as a stand alone transponder or as a function decoder, choose an address that is not associated with another mobile decoder address in use on the layout.2. Connect the RED & BLACK wires of the TL1 to a service mode DCC programmer and program the TL1's address as you would any mobile decoder address.Follow the ...

Your DT402/DT400 throttle comes from the factory set for “Local” Stop. When you press the EMRG STOP Key , the loco address that is active on your display (the one with the blinking smoke) will stop.When you press the EMRG STOP Key again, the loco address on the other throttle of your DT400 will stop.You can use the OPTN t Key to change the EMRG STOP to “Global” Stop.With global stop option enabled, pressing the EMRG STOP Key will stop all locos on the layout and you will see the throttle's track power indicator blinking on and off.To resume operations, press ...

LocoNet's "ethernet like" architecture seems interesting and more advanced than the systems used by other DCC manufacturers. But, at the numbers we are talking about (a few controllers and perhaps 10-20 decoders), does it really make a difference?If your system operates with a few throttles and other devices attached any of the commercially available systems will work today. But what about tomorrow? Remember when a hard-drive bigger than 32Mb seemed excessive- and remember when DOS had to change to 16bit FATs/ directories? Also, the LBA access change at 540Mb also once seemed unthinkable!!The network structure of LocoNet is very important ...

The layout uses twenty-eight turnouts on the mainline and an additional eleven turnouts in the yard. Each turnout is powered by a Tortoise slow motion turnout motor. Each of the twenty-eight mainline turnouts has three dwarf signals associated with it. The aspects of the signals are shown below. The indications of the signals are: Green = Proceed Yellow = Proceed with caution Red = Stop Each signal has one head with two LEDs. There are also thirty-eight mainline block signals (red/green) that are controlled by heavy duty single pole double throw relays. This makes a total of 122 signals. Since ...

I am a 'newbie' to model railroading.  I have a 10' x 10' room put aside for my layout which will be basically a U or horseshoe shape going around three of the walls.  I am using Atlas code 55 in N scale. Since I'm starting from scratch, I want to do it RIGHT and that is why I've decided to buy DCC straight away. I want to run a maximum of 4 trains at once. I would like the capability of having two users (drivers) operating at the same time, but I want to manually set turnouts. I will ...

Each DCC decoder that is installed in a locomotive is assigned a unique address. To select a locomotive and run it on either throttle, you must know the address assigned to the decoder. Digitrax decoders are set up at the factory with the “default” digital address of 03. This means that when you take a Digitrax decoder out of the package and install it in your loco, you can select address 03 on your throttle and run the decoder. The first Configuration Variable (CV) programmed by most DCC users is the decoder’s address since it is not very useful to ...

Is this part of the instructions sheet?  If so, we don't need it here?  ZIThe DN163K2 is set up at the factory to control six functions. The unit is prewired with two golden-white LEDs set up for directional lighting as F0F/F0F+ for the front light and F0R/F0R+ for the rear light. Functions F1 (Green), F2 (Violet), F3 (Brown) and F4 (White/Yellow) can be used by soldering a wire from the pad for the function you wish to use to the lamp (or other function) you wish to control. The wire colors indicated are the standard color code used in the ...

Hooking up the UP5's Power Supply (Optional but highly recommended to make sure LocoNet voltage is adequate to control large layouts)The optional power supply (PS14) can be connected to one or more UP and/or UR panels to provide additional power for LocoNet operation and for battery saving power to any Digitrax throttle that is plugged into any of the powered panels.1. Plug the PS14 into the DC jack located on the side of the UP5 circuit board.2. Connect the +Common point on each additional board (located between the two LocoNet jacks) to the powered board with 22AWG wire (Figure 2). ...

LocoNet typically supports a total cable length of up to 2,000 feet with no two devices connected by more than 600 feet of cable. LocoNet wiring is totally free-form. We do not recommend looping LocoNet back on itself.Making your own LocoNet Cables is simple and cost effective. LocoNet wiring consists of readily available wire and connectors. LocoNet uses flat 6 conductor wire and 6-pin RJ12 connectors. This kind of wiring is typically used for telephone wiring. Most Digitrax dealers can make up LocoNet cables for you. If you plan on wiring a large layout, you may want to invest in ...

Digitrax boosters have maximum output current limits of either 5 or 8 amps. The actual continuous output current that your booster will provide to the layout depends on several factors including the input supply voltage, the ambient room temperature and air flow over the booster's heat sink. Higher input voltages increase the amount of heat that must be dissipated by the booster's heat sink. If the heat sink does not get enough air flow to allow for heat dissipation, the booster will eventually reach an over temperature state and shut down. A small fan blowing across the heat sink on ...

Choose a locomotive that runs well on conventional DC power. Digital decoders cannot compensate for faulty motor operation, poor track pickup, etc. If you are not happy with the way your locomotive runs on regular DC power, installing a decoder will not make it run any better. If there are any mechanical issues with your locomotive, fix them before you install the decoder. Since you have to open up the loco anyway, do a tune up to get it running really well before you put in the decoder. Digitrax recommends using a conductive brush lubricant like Aero Car Technology's "Conducta" ...

The DS64 is a powerful stationary decoder. If you have tried to program this stationary decoder and are having problems, there are several things that you can do before contacting Tech Support for further help. Is the DS64 receiving enough power? The DS64 can be powered in several different ways. Although it is possible to power the DS64 from track power, this has been a source of problems for many operators due to low voltage. This typically arises on a railroad that is using power in excess of the capacities of its power supplies. Have you programmed all four addresses ...

This installation covers how to install a Digitrax decoder with wires in any Athearn HO locomotive.  Use either our DH123 (headlight functions only) or DH163 (headlights plus additional functions) for this installation.*** Note: This installation is based on installing a Digitrax wired decoder in an Athearn Dash 9-44CW. The process is similar for any Digitrax mobile decoder with wires. The instructions are also easily applicable for any Athearn locomotive.These instructions assume that you have already run the loco and have established that it is working properly before beginning installation. Remember, installing a decoder in a locomotive will not improve its ...

Installation Notes: 1. Do not exceed the decoder’s 500mA total function output rating. 2. If you plan to use functions F1 (traditionally a green wire) or F2 (traditionally violet), the return, also called +Common or Lamp Common, should be made via a wire carefully soldered to the Common (or blue) pin indicated as shown in Figure1. 3. To use a function output with an inductive (coil) type load, you must install a kick-back suppression diode across the connections. If controlling a coil type load, such as an electromechanical relay or motor, shutting the device off can cause an inductive kick-back ...

1. Carefully remove the locomotive’s shell from the frame. Notice the orientation of the shell to the frame (Figure 1) so that you can reinstall the shell correctly. 2. Remove the dummy plug from the locomotive’s DCC-ready socket. (Figure 2) The jumper plug allows the loco to operate on a standard DC track or in analog mode on a DCC track. Pin 1 is marked for proper orientation of the decoder. 3. The DZ125PS has a short, 1" harness with a DCC 8-pin plug on the end of it. The plug is oriented so the pin for the orange wire ...

Q:  I have an HO Bachmann Alaska EMD GP40 (Bachmann item #63548) that I have kept in the box for about a year. I recently received a Digitrax Zephyr and I want to put a decoder in the locomotive. I used your reference guide and did not see it listed. Does that mean it's not available? A:  There are many reasons why a particular locomotive is not listed in our database.  The most common is that we have never been asked about that particular model.  There are so many new models it is a difficult task to keep up with ...

DCS240 FAQ   I’m getting a “StealZap” or message on my DT402 rev 2 throttle. What is this? This is a feature that helps prevent having the same address selected on multiple throttles and creating unexpected operations.  When you steal you are truly stealing control of the locomotive instead of sharing it as was the case before the DCS240 and DT402 R2 firmware were released. When using a DT402 R2 throttle with an Advanced Command Station featuring expanded slots, each throttle ID is associated with the Loco Addresses it has selected.  When you select a Loco that is selected on ...

The DH165Q1 is set up at the factory to control six function outputs. The DH165Q1 is configured to control the forward-headlight F0F/white lead and reverse-headlight F0R/yellow lead for directional lighting. These two headlight function leads are current regulated for LEDs or lamps, with factory setting of approx 15mA, with no resistors required. Cut the ADJ link to increase headlight current to approx 30mA- see fig 5. Functions F1 (Green), F2 (Violet), F3 (Brown) and F4 (White/Yellow) are full track voltage and can be used by soldering a wire from the pad for the function you wish to use to the ...

The DN163A1 is set up at the factory to control six functions. The unit is prewired with two golden-white LEDs set up for directional lighting as F0F/F0F+ for the front light and F0R/F0R+ for the rear light. Functions F1 (Green), F2 (Violet), F3 (Brown) and F4 (White/Yellow) can be used by soldering a wire from the pad for the function you wish to use to the lamp (or other function) you wish to control. The wire colors indicated are the standard color code used in the industry (you can use any color you like). These colors are important if you ...

Connecting a PS2012 DC power supply to an “Advanced Booster”  DCS240 and sharing with older Command Stations and Boosters: The 2016 US DOE external power supply Efficiency requirements effectively require using DC input power and supplies for new-design products including our Advanced Command Stations/Boosters.     Digitrax does not recommend sharing a suitable DC supply for an Advanced type unit like a DCS240 with older Legacy Digitrax Command Stations/Boosters designed to run on AC output transformers. This is because the common Booster Ground (typically pin 4’s) and negative power return wires have a diode offset in non-Advanced (AC input)  units ...

  Digitrax Duplex Wireless Functional diagnosis and debug process:   Duplex Background:  The Digitrax Duplex radio system is a two-way RF radio link connecting wireless throttles (DT402D & UT4D) via a UR92 onto LocoNet.  It operates on one of 16 user-selected channels in the 2.4GHz Wi-Fi frequency band.  FCC rules requires that all WI FI devices including the RF24 Duplex transceivers (part of Digitrax Duplex throttles and the UR92) operate co-cooperatively in this 2.4GHz band and have to accept whatever wirelessenvironment is present.  This means that there is no guarantee that Digitrax Duplex will work in all situations or that it will ...

When the BDL168 is connected to LocoNet, it will communicate coded detection information to the system. If you wish to report BDL168 status to LocoNet and attached devices or computers that can interpret these messages, you will probably want to set up a unique board address for each BDL168. This is done so that the BDL168 Board ID does not conflict with the Board ID of other devices on the railroad. Board addresses can range from 01 to 999. It is recommended that you make a record of the addresses you use for all devices connected to your layout. Setting ...

The LT1 is a simple decoder tester. Decoder Testing Instructions1. Prepare the cable for use in the testing procedure, by stripping the insulation from the Red, Green, Black, and Yellow wires. The Blue and White wires are not used and can be cut off the harness.2. Twist the RED and YELLOW wires together. Twist the BLACK and GREEN wires together. 3. Hook up decoder as shown in Diagram 2.4. Use your throttle to select the decoder and run it in the forward direction.5. One of the two center LEDs will light as the motor voltage from the decoder increases. Use ...

DCS50’s Jump A & B ports can host two DC power packs that work as additional throttles to control DCC locomotives.You begin with an operating DCS50 attached to your layout.   In addition to the throttle built into the DCS50, you can create a LocoNet to add additional Digitrax throttles and other Digitrax devices.  Jump Ports:You can also connect up one or two smooth DC power packs as shown in the following illustration.  These power packs must also be powered, since the Zephyr jump throttle connections detect the voltage level from the individual power pack(s) and makes adjustments to the command control ...

Here are several things to check if you are having trouble with the BDL168: Proper Wiring Be sure that you have NOT connected pin 11 to pin M, as this can prevent proper LocoNet communication. Check to make sure not wires are touching adjacent pins.  Follow the wiring diagram closely. Packet Reception Be sure the green ID LED is ON & is “winking” off about every 2 seconds. This means that correctly formatted DCC packets are being decoded from the left most (Railsync) pin of the RJ12 LocoNet socket. For DCC detection, the same DCC packet signal that drives the ...

Your DCS50 has two sets of DCC outputs. This means that you will be able to program decoders using one set of DCC outputs while the layout is running on the other set of DCC outputs. When you hooked up your DCS50 to the layout, you used the RAIL A & RAIL B connections to the track. Now we will use the PROG A & PROG B outputs to set up a service mode programming track.NOTE: The programming track is powered for programming only and cannot run locomotives. You will have to manually move your locomotive on to the track ...

The DH165K0 is set up at the factory to control six function outputs. The DH165K0 is configured to control the forward-headlight F0F/white lead and reverse-headlight F0R/yellow lead for directional lighting. These two headlight function leads are current regulated for LEDs or lamps, with factory setting of approx 15mA, with no resistors required. Cut the ADJ link to increase headlight current to approx 30mA- see fig 5. Functions F1 (Green), F2 (Violet), F3 (Brown) and F4 (White/Yellow) are full track voltage and can be used by soldering a wire from the pad for the function you wish to use to the ...

My layout is the Apex & Hypotenuse design, from the Atlas design. I was wondering where would you suggest I wire the AR1. We remember this layout design, if for no other reason than its ingenious complexity. This railroad initially appeared in the Custom Line King Size Plan Book - H0 Railroads You Can Build, originally published by Atlas Tool in 1966. This book was yet another collaboration between the late John Armstrong and illustrator Thaddeus (Tad) Stepek. This railroad must have required a certain level of dexterity by the operator since the reversing segment is actually two different return ...

The DH165A0 is set up at the factory to control six function outputs. The DH165A0 is configured to control the forward-headlight F0F/white lead and reverse-headlight F0R/yellow lead for directional lighting. These two headlight function leads are current regulated for LEDs or lamps, with factory setting of approx 15mA, with no resistors required. Cut the ADJ link to increase headlight current to approx 30mA (see figure below). Functions F1 (Green), F2 (Violet), F3 (Brown) and F4 (White/Yellow) are full track voltage and can be used by soldering a wire from the pad for the function you wish to use to the ...

You can operate reversing sections manually or automatically with Digitrax. You must double gap (completely isolate) both ends of the reversing section just like with any other layout. If you choose manual operation, use a DPDT switch or relay to handle the polarity change as the loco enters and leaves the reversing section.   If you choose to use to completely automate the reversing section, power the reverse loop with a booster and power supply and the main layout with another Command Station and power supply. The WTL12 when running as your command station will not auto-reverse.  To configure your ...

This program allows monitoring of LocoNet message traffic and operations. It is available on our downloads page as a ZIP file and is provided for Digitrax customer convenience. This utility is provided on an as-is basis for users with Windows based machines configured to work with this software, and the ability to perform the setup and operation tasks detailed below. Techsupport is not configured to diagnose issues related to operating system, hardware, configuration or other possible problem areas that may cause problems with running these utilities.   This program allows monitoring of LocoNet message traffic and operations. a) Copy this ...

How to read back and change BDL168 Option Switches (OpSw): 1. Power up your BDL168 and connect it to LocoNet. 2. Connect a DT series or UT1, UT2 Digitrax throttle to one of the the BDL168's LocoNet connectors. NOTE: The UT4 will not work as its design is different for the original UT series throttles.3. Press the switch behind the red option LED for about 1 second, then release it. The red option and green ID LEDs will flash alternately to let you know that you are in option switch setup mode. 4. Go into SWITCH mode on your throttle. ...

LocoNet is Digitrax's method of communication between LocoNet compatible devices on a model railroad layout.  LocoNet compatible devices are designed to work together on the network, and in some cases can also accept DCC commands from  the track, but often go beyond the scope of simple DCC train control.   LocoNet is a peer-to-peer Ethernet type multiple access network.  Because of its design architecture, it is very robust and powerful.  Layout implementation is simple and wiring is free form with minimal limits. LocoNet is designed to run an unshielded 6 conductor ribbon cable.  Digitrax recommends using flat, six-conductor telephone wire ...

Many operators use a fast clock during operating sessions to simulate prototypical operations. Traditionally, this clock is on the wall and is set up to run at a faster than normal rate. LocoNet has its own networked fast clock for all Digitrax throttles connected to your system.To use the Fast clock feature of the DT300, you must be plugged into a Digitrax command station.When there is no activity on your DT300 for more than about 6 seconds, the DT300 will revert to the default display. Your DT300 was shipped with Lo (Loco) mode, showing the current speed of selected loco(s), ...

  Duplex Radio Throttle do not need to be plugged in to LocoNet to Program Decoders.  Simplex Radio & Infrared throttles must be plugged in to LocoNet to program CVs on the programming track. Ops Mode Programming can be done without plugging radio throttles in to LocoNet. IR throttles must be plugged in for Ops Mode Programming. 1. Be sure that only the loco you want to program is on the programming track. If you are using operations mode programming, the loco you want to program can be anywhere on the layout but it must have a decoder that is ...

Note the SFX006 is identical.  These instructions pertain to both Soundbugs.   1) Identify the correct orientation and mounting side of the DH165 series Decoder with SFX004 Soundbug Socket to plug this sound module into. There is text saying "SFX here" etc,. The SFX004 must only be mounted from the correct side and orientation, for each of the DH165 host decoders. 2) With correct orientation noted from step 1, align the dual row of SFX004 connector pins to the matching holes in the DH165 host PCB. Apply gentle and firm pressure behind the SFX004 connector to engage the pins until ...

  CV29 is assigned a single value which chooses a combination of specific effects: 1. Speed step control. 2. Speed table On or Off. 3. Analog mode conversion On or Off. 4. Normal Direction of Travel (NDOT). 5. 2 digit addressing or 4 digit addressing. Analog Mode Analog mode conversion is very convenient if you plan to run your Digitrax decoded locomotive on regular DC layouts. With analog mode conversion enabled, the decoder will automatically begin operating as a DC locomotive when no DCC signal is detected by the decoder. This means that if you place your Digitrax decoder equipped ...

To control the speed of a locomotive:1. Select the loco address on the Zephyr.2.  Place the reverse lever [2] into either forward or reverse.3. Turn the Throttle Knob  [1] clockwise to increase speed and counterclockwise to decrease speed. Setting Speed LimitsYou can limit the speed on any locomotive controlled by the DCS50. This feature is very useful if you are running your layout with young children who want to make the trains GO FAST!!! By setting a reasonable speed limit on the throttles used by the children, everyone can have more fun with the trains.To set a “speed limit” for ...

This Atlas Snap-Track layout appears in the Atlas Model Railroad Company's book "Beginner's Guide to HO Model Railroading". It includes a reversing section which can be controlled with a Digitrax AR1. DC Control For DC operation, Atlas specified an Atlas Controller (for the reverse loop), two Atlas Selectors (to control eight track segments) and seven controllers for the railroad's turnouts. DCC Makes Things Simple With DCC, the wiring of this railroad is considerably simpler. Because each locomotive has a unique address, the section insulated gaps and the two Selectors are not necessary. Likewise, the Controller is replaced with the AR1 ...

I was planning on purchasing the Digitrax Super Chief Radio 5 amps but several members in the club told me to buy them Super Chief Radio 8 amp for my HO Layout.  They said you will need the power when you start expanding.Question:Is it ok to use the 8 amp version for my HO layout?Answer:Yes it is fine to use 8 amp Digitrax boosters on your HO layout.  The choice between 8 amp and 5 amp command station/boosters, it is a question of how much power your railroad is likely to consume on your railroad as it is built today.  ...

Characteristics Controlled by CV61:Some Digitrax Decoders use CV61 (one of the manufacturer specific configuration variables) to give you the following options:  Non-Directional Headlight Operation, Transponding Enabled or Disabled, & Split Phase Motor Drive for Märklin AC and Lionel Type motors.The look up table below shows the effects of different CV values that you can program into CV61.  CV values are shown in hex & decimal are the same in this case.TABLE 61: CV61 Values CV 61 Value Non-directional headlights Transponding Split Field Motor/AC 00 No No No 01 Yes No No 02 No Yes No 03 Yes Yes No 04 ...

Shutting Down Your Zephyr when you are finished running.Some users prefer to release all addresses active in their system before shutting down. This can prevent unexpected results when you power up the layout again.  There are two ways to do this. ________________________________________________________________________________________________________________To release addresses one at a time (this is optional):1. Press the LOCO key. 2. Enter the loco address on the numeric keypad. The display will flash the Function Indicator Dot and the loco address. Press the LOCO key again.3. Set the Throttle Knob to STOP.4. Press the EXIT key.5. Repeat for all locos/addresses used in your session._____________________________________________________________________________________________________Alternately, you can clear all ...

The answer to this question applies to all Empire Builder sets including Super Empire Builder XtraQ:  I have just purchased a Super Empire Builder set. My expectations are for it to operate an N-Scale switching layout right now with future expansion to a larger N-Scale layout. I am a little confused as to which power supply I would need at this time. I am reading about power supplies and inline fuses, all of which is a little overwhelming to me as I am getting back into the hobby. Can you recommend which power supply will be better for me as ...

Duplex Radio throttles (D throttles), do not have to be plugged in to add loco addresses to consists. Simplex Radio (R throttles) and Tethered/Infrared throttles must be plugged in to LocoNet to add loco addresses to consists.  To set up a consist using your DT400/DT402 Series throttle: 1. Select the loco address of the TOP loco on the R Throttle Knob. 2. Select the address of the loco you want to consist to the TOP loco on the L Throttle Knob. 3. Move the two locomotives into position. The locomotives can be headed in either direction. They can be adjacent to each other ...

Regulated power supply delivers more power with less heat for more efficient booster operation. Operates up to 4 Five amp boosters. Scale selectable for use with N, HO or large scale. DC Ammeter. On/Off Switch. Integral cooling fan. Design coordinated for use with Digitrax products. One "Y" Cable (P/N YC52) Included for convenience with dual 5 amp protected outputs All secondary devices must be properly fused on their power input leads for their rated capacity. For example if you intend to use the PS2012 to drive a 5 and an 8 amp booster, you must input fuse these devices for ...

1) Connect the Red and Black track wires from the 9 pin Track and Function harness to the locomotive track power connections.2) Connect the function leads that are to be used from the 9pin Track and Function harness. Note that to be able to readback Sound FX CV's a combination of function lead loads of at least 60mA at 12volts should be connected to these function leads. Insulate the unused function leads so they cannot short to the locomotive frame or track power.3) Mount the 28mm speaker attached to the 10pin sound feature harness in an appropriate sound enclosure. Be ...

Track voltage on DC (analog) layouts can be measured from rail to rail.  However, with DCC layouts that use direct home wiring as recommended by Digitrax, this method of measurement does not work with most voltmeters.Track voltage (output from the booster to the rail) on DCC layouts with direct home wiring can be measured as follows:1.     With the system powered up and with the TRACK STATUS LED on, use your throttle to select the analog address 00 and set the speed to 00.2.     With a multimeter set to the 20 volt DC scale, measure the voltage from RAIL A ...

  Many prototype trains use multiple locomotives to provide the necessary power to pull or push the train. This practice is called Multiple Unit consisting, usually shortened to MU or consisting. The DT300 Throttle can provide three methods of consist control:1. The Basic Consisting method, which is not commonly used, is to program all the locomotives in a consist to the same address and run them on one throttle. In this case all the locomotives must be headed in the same direction, head to tail, head to tail, head to tail. If you use decoders that allow you to set ...

I am now constructing an N-Scale layout with Digitrax DCC system. I know SE8C and two-heads signal mast supplied by your company are applicable for a entry signal mast for the both of main and siding (branch) lines. However, I don't know how the signal mast is used in the case of "more than two" siding lines. For example, the next picture was taken in Powder River Basin (Converse Jct.) in Wyoming State. TS, Japan In this picture, some two-heads signal (mast) can be seen. In every signal mast, the top signal head will be for a main line. But, ...

In earlier generations of model railroading, the reverse loop (reversing section) was the bane of many model railroaders. As the rails of a track come back upon themselves, an electrical short circuit is created. In the analog control world, the solution is to use toggle switches and special wiring to allow the locomotive to move on to the next block. Electromechanical solutions relying on relays and track detectors can also be used to automate reversing on an analog layout. The wye is another example of a reversing section on a layout. One of the advantages of digital command control is ...

The BDL168 manual states that 2 RX4's can be connected but it only shows how to connect one of them on Aux 2. How is the second RX4 connected? The RX4 is a 4 Zone Transponding Receiver Add-on for BDL16 series occupancy detectors. Each RX4 is made up of 4 RX1 sensors, a ribbon cable and a connector that lets you plug the unit into a BDL16-series detector. The earlier BDL16 and BDL162 occupancy detectors had the capacity for hosting one RX4. BDL16 & BDL162 boards are labeled with AUX1 & AUX2. Only the AUX2 connection should be used for ...

Over the years, different Digitrax throttles have used a combination of decimal, modified hexadecimal and hexadecimal numbers for entering CV numbers and CV values.  The following information is provided as a programming reference to show you how these different schemes work so that you will be able to use your throttle to program decoders.UT1 & UT2 Utility Throttles use decimal numbers exclusively for CV numbers and CV values.  Because these throttles use 2 selector switches that can access the numbers 0-9, you are limited to programming only CV#s and values from 00 to 99.DT100 Throttles use a modified hex numbering ...

When you hear 7 beeps when power is applied to your DCS100, you need to replace the CMOS battery. The DCS100 will continue to operate, even if this battery is not present, but all your memory settings and option switch settings will not be remembered when the DCS100 is powered down. To replace the CMOS battery without losing any memory settings: 1. Remove the DCS100 input power & disconnect all DCS100 leads. 2. Open the DCS100 case:  a. Remove the two screws on the top and bottom of each side of the case. b. Slide the gray front panel off ...

Wired Mobile Decoder with SoundFX™+Accessory type functions for most HO scale Locomotives. 1. Connect the Red and Black track wires from the 7 connector Track and Function leads to the locomotive track power connections. 2. Connect the function leads that are to be used from the 7 conductor Track and Function wire set. Note that to be able to readback Sound FX CV's a combination of function lead loads of at least 60mA at 12volts should be connected to these function leads. Insulate the unused function leads so they cannot short to the locomotive frame or track power. 3. Mount ...

  Connecting BD4 to an SE8C?The BD4 is a block occupancy detection device designed as an add-on device that can take advantage of the LocoNet hosting capability of the SE8c signal decoder.   It is connected this way: The installation of a BD4 is relatively simple. Looking at the BD4, you will find a 5-point terminal block on one end and two (LED1 and DS1) 10-pin (5x2) headers on the other. There are three termination areas: a) The 5-point terminal block (left) is for the interconnection between the rail power source and the rails. b) The LED1 10-pin header is ...

The track plan of the model Kelana Jaya Rail Line is shown below: Included in the model is the double track mainline with crossovers, two elevated stations with center platforms, one at-grade station with outside platforms and two underground stations, also with center platforms. The storage yard, maintenance yard and reversing loop at one end of the system and the four track stub terminal at the other end of the system are also modeled. The yard, station tracks, crossing loops and distances between stations are all scaled to hold trains no larger than three cars. The layout is designed to ...

  How do I program the PM42 Op Switches with a DCS50 (Zephyr) throttle? The PM42 OpSw settings are used to set up the PM42, adjusting the trip current, short circuit management (including sensitivity), and/or auto-reversing. Note: The factory default setting on all PM42 OpSw's is “thrown” or “t”. Follow the steps outlined below to program the OpSw settings of the PM42 using the keypad of a Digitrax Zephyr. 1. Connect the PM42 to the Digitrax Zephyr with a standard LocoNet cable. 2. Connect the PM42 to an external power source; Digitrax recommends the PS14. Note: Before entering Switch Mode ...

  My layout is in N scale, with an 85 foot double track main, a 12 track storage area, small yard, and engine facility. The layout measures 10 X 14 with two helices. There are a total of 34 engines, many of which are with their trains in the storage area. All of the already made-up trains (11) have two or three engines on them, ready to be brought up via a helix to run on the railroad. Currently, the road is divided into six parallel blocks (DC); 12 blocks in all. In the future, I plan on adding a ...

The Kelana Jaya Rail Line model layout uses WinLok 2.1 running on a PC under Windows 98 to operate the trains, turnouts, signals and to use the feedback from the block detectors for train control. This equipment was configured and programmed to PUTRA's specifications by Dr. Hans R. Tanner of DigiToys Systems. PUTRA specified the following capabilities for the control system used for the simulation: 1. Run eight trains at once in any combination of automated or manual control. 2. Define specific routings and be able to assign automatically or manually any route to any train at the time the ...

LNWI Advanced Options Status LEDs: The LNWI has two status LEDS Green ID indicator and a Red OPS indicator.  The state of these indicators can be interpreted to provide status information and also some useful diagnostic insights. Table 1: Status LEDs LED Status Indicates Green ID indicator mostly lit, winking OFF every 3 seconds LNWI is powered and connected to LocoNet Green ID indicator mostly off, blinking ON every 3 seconds LNWI is powered and LocoNet is not connected or sleeping Green ID indicator winks OFF LNWI received a good LocoNet Message Red OPS indicator blinks ON LNWI received a ...

Q:  Using Digitrax systems to program an MRC AD310 decoder is especially confusing because the MRC Command 2000 uses several "switches" and "levers" rather than standard CV numbers. A conversion chart for the 10 possible MRC engine addresses would be a wonderful help to us old-timers. A:  The documentation available from the manufacturer of this decoder is incomplete. Many older decoders such as this one are not able to recognize all the digital packets in use by more modern DCC Systems. What we have learned is the MRC AD310 is: Programmable up to 127 (1~127) locomotive addresses Programmable for either 28 or ...

Digitrax decoders have outputs that can control lamps and other on/off devices installed in your locomotive.  These are called functions.  Functions are things like: lamps, sound units, smoke units, etc. All Digitrax decoders are equipped with two or more function outputs that are used to turn functions on and off.Decoder function outputs can be:1.   Leads (wires) attached to the decoder that are used to hook up external functions.  See Table I below for wire color codes used on Digitrax decoders.or2.   Pre-wired function outputs that hook up by just plugging in the decoder. This is the case for decoders that ...

DT402 & DT400 Selecting and Running A Locomotive If a throttle knob does not have a locomotive selected when you make it active by turning or pressing the L or R Throttle knob or Reverse Key, flashing “SEL” will appear in place of the locomotive address in the LCD display. This is a prompt for you to select a locomotive on that throttle. 1. Choose which Throttle (L or R) you want to use to run a locomotive.Make it the active throttle by turning it a 1/4 turn in either direction or by single clicking the throttle knob. If there ...

Common Rail Wiring Many older model railroads use Common Rail wiring because they were initially wired to operate with electrical toggle switches. Conversion to DCC is possible with Common Rail, but it is not recommended. Whole layout common rail is a method of wiring layouts where power districts and their boosters are electrically connected using a common rail or common power bus return wire. Whole layout common rail wiring is a disadvantage when it comes to detection systems since detectors cannot independently monitor whether zone power is on or off so they can't tell whether occupancy detection is working in ...

DT402 & DT400 Series Throttles Track Power ON and OFF When track power is on: The Throttle's Track Power Indicator is on solid (small dot in the top line on the right side of the LCD)   Command Station TRACK STATUS indicator is lit   and Command Station OFF LINE indicator is off To turn track power on: Press the PWR Key and the LCD will display a screen similar to this: Press the Y + Key to turn on track power. Press the PWR Key again to exit Power On/Off Mode. You may also press any other key to go directly ...

I'm looking to wire Tortoise switch machines on a DS64. When the track switch is thrown I want to power 1 color light (non-LED). When the track switch is closed, power a different colored light. Is this possible using the DS64 inputs or the Tortoise connections? The DS64 does not have separate connections for indicator lights for trackside or for a control panel. However, indicator lights can still wired to work with the DS64. Tortoise or other slow motion swith machines can be wired in two different ways. If using LEDs, a two leg, bipolar LED can be connected in ...

Another way to describe "stealing" is "sharing"; it is a process where one operator can mutually control a mobile decoder with another operator.This feature can be useful for training new operators or supervising engineers who insist on breaking the speed limit. The supervisor can "steal" a locomotive that is selected on a trainee's throttle and be able to closely supervise that locomotive's control, taking over when necessary. The supervisor can gain instant override control without having to physically "grab" the trainee's throttle. This lets you have unskilled visitors participating and enjoying operations without too much anxiety for either party.If you ...

Based upon a layout designed by the late, great John Armstrong which appears in the classic book, 101 Trackplans for Model Railroads [Kalmbach Publishing, 400-12012, still in print], this railroad combines different elements to offer varied model railroad operations. At the center right of the railroad is the Union Passenger Station. From this station, trains can operate out & back, which is to say that a passenger train leaves the station, goes out onto the circular main line and eventually comes back into the station after passing through the reverse loop. Another passenger train can operate point to point, meaning ...

The Texas & Southwestern has a reversing loop, and DCC insures reliable and simple operation of trains in the reverse loop. This reverse loop is handled with a Digitrax AR1 Auto Reversing Controller. The automated features of the AR-1 make for seamless train movements, but an issue quickly arose. Because a reverse loop in a traditional DC-powered model railroad environment required manual operation, the track insulating gaps for the loop were usually located for the convenience of the operators. So the track gaps of the original track plan were situated to keep this inconvenience to a minimum. Note also all ...

Q:  As an HOn3 advocate and new to DCC with early PFM engines (2-6-0 & 2-8-0 motors in tender and some smaller ones) what would be the suggested decoder (am not sure am identifying the part correctly) that would be used in these engines? All I have seen so far identifies items used in H0 standard gauge. A:  Digitrax has many happy Narrow Gauge customers.  You'll need to consider three things to join their ranks.1.  The physical size of the decoder, because narrow gauge engines are smaller than Standard Gauge locomotives. Since your space is limited, using smaller decoders is the solution. Digitrax ...

For normal tethered operation, the DT402 series throttles do not need a battery. To use your DT402/R/D as an infrared or radio throttle, you must install a 9 volt battery. When you install the battery, the throttle will report the battery voltage then show the last display screen. We recommend that you remove the battery from throttle if it is unplugged from the system to conserve battery life. The battery can be stored inside the DT402/R/D by removing the battery and putting it back in the battery compartment with the polarity reversed. Be careful here, see the diagram below for ...

Remember, the EXIT Key will take you back to the Fn Mode for Normal Loco Operations.

The BDL168 can be used as an autoreversing unit for return loops. One of the BDL168 Detection Sections is connected to the non-reversing area, with the balance of the detection connections being made within the reversing area. Here is a wiring example: Note that an auto-reverse section can only use detection sections that are contained in a BDL168 zone that is correctly set up for auto-reversing.

Detection Section Inputs DS01 to DS08 (see below) are inputs from occupancy detectors that provide at least +5V (max 22V) when occupied, and 0V when unoccupied. The SE8C sends occupancy messages to LocoNet when these inputs change. If these detection section inputs are not disconnected, they will report “unoccupied”. Occupancy reporting can be turned off by changing OpSw 13 to closed.

Can the DS52 be powered directly from a 13.8 v DC external power supply instead of the rails? No. Screw Terminals 4 & 5 are used to not only supply power to the DS52 from the track but also are the path that is used to both program the DS52 and to operate the DS52 via a throttle or computer program.

I have numerous locomotives I wish to convert to DCC. In order to spread the cost out over time I would like to install the connector/harness and add the decoder at a later date. Is it possible to buy the connector/harness assembly separately? Yes, there are several harnesses which are part of the Digitrax Easy Connect systemThis System Included the:DHWH - 9 pin to bare wires wire harnessDHDP - 9 pin dummy plugs to convert for analog operationDHWHPS - 9 pin to DCC medium plug short harness 1"DHWHP - 9 pin to DCC medium plug long harness 3"DHAT - 9 pin ...

The DZ125IN is set up at the factory to control two function outputs. The DZ125IN is configured to control the forward and reverse lights on the locomotive through the white lead and yellow lead using Function 0 (F0F-forward and F0R-reverse) for directional lighting. Both function outputs can be easily set up with Digitrax FX3 lighting effects or as standard on/off functions with the following operational qualifiers: 1. Forward or Reverse direction of travel, or 2. Whether F0 is on or off, or 3. Both direction of travel and whether F0 is on or off, or 4. Whether the locomotive is ...

I have purchased an LNRP, UR90, and 4 UP5s. I have noticed the LNRP seems to have a solder point between the two LocoNet jacks as the UR90 and UP5.Can all of these be connected to the same 12 volt power supply? No. It is important that each LNRP has its own power supply. As noted in the documentation that comes with the unit, "the LNRP drives the power and Railsync signals on the standard LocoNet cable segments, so each LNRP should have a DC input of +12V to +18V at up to 250mA supplied on the side DC power ...

The NET indicator is a red LED that displays information about what the DCS100 sees on LocoNet. When your layout is wired correctly and LocoNet is operating properly, the NET indicator will be on and it will flicker off any time a good LocoNet message is detected by the DCS100. The table below explains the patterns you will see for this indicator.

1) Does the LNRP terminate and re-time the LocoNet data signal in both directions? Yes 2) Does the LNRP repower the LocoNet data lines for each segment? Yes 3) What happens to the signal on a protected segment when there is a fault on an adjacent segment? Nothing, it keeps going 4) What happens RailSync on a protected segment when there is a fault on an adjacent segment? Nothing, it keeps going 5) What do the various diagnostics/error indicators really do? They monitor and report the protected sides. A Digitrax PS14 power supply is required for correct operation.

DT300 throttles can be converted to simplex radio by Digitrax. The DT300 cannot be converted to duplex radio. This radio retrofit must be done at the Digitrax factory because of FCC rules. Please complete the form in the warranty section of the website and send it in with your throttle.  Be aware the long cord will be cut off to 12", no exceptions.

  As of 2017, UT4 throttles can only be converted to duplex.  Digitrax discontinued simplex radio upgrades due to lack of parts. This radio retrofit must be done at the Digitrax factory because of FCC rules. Please complete the form in the warranty section of the website and send it in with your throttle.  Be aware the long cord will be cut off to 12", no exceptions.

Can the SoundBug sound like a juice jack, i.e. a GG1? Yes. The SoundBug, like all Digitrax Sound FX decoders, can be set up with any available sound project. Any recorded sounds can be set up as a sound project file (.spj) which relates the sounds to individual actions of the locomotive. Many project files are available on the Digitrax Sound Depot and on the web.  Sound projects are free. 

How do you wire an AR1 with a BD4 so that you get block detection within the reverse loop and without the BD4 permanently detecting the AR1? It should be wired with the AR1 between the power source and the BD4. All four detection sections of the BD4 will have to be inside the reverse loop.

Q:  Can I set up the DS54 to act as an emergnecy stop device? A:  Any unused DS54 input can be configured to send an Emergency (OPC_IDLE) Stop packet. The typical Emergency Stop circuit is a supervised series of one, or more, normally closed switches or contacts. When any one of these devices is opened the circuit is deactivated and everything affected by the Emergency Stop circuit immediately shuts down. The following drawing depicts a typical Emergency Stop circuit using a DS54. 

Some internet experts INSIST that DCC bus wires must be twisted, presumably to prevent crosstalk and interference. Is this required by Digitrax?Digitrax does not require twisted wires on feeders etc, but suggests appropriate wire sizes and keeping feeder run lengths to a minimum because of resistance/power loss issues.

Since many Zephyr and Zephyr Xtra Starter Sets are used on smaller railroads, a natural choice for setting up an automatic reversing section would be an AR1. If you have more than one reverse loop, then the PM42 is a better choice. These automatic reversing strategies will work equally well for any Digitrax system using any Digitrax Starter Set.  Alternately for larger railroads, an auto reversing booster such as the DB150 can be used for automatic reversing if the section is large.

Function-only decoders allow you to add additional functions to a locomotive with an existing mobile decoder.  Additionally, function-only decoders allow you to install lighting in passenger cars, as an example.Function only decoders also are used to add Digitrax transponding to early model Digitrax decoders and decoders from other manufacturers that do not have this feature.

The FIND Key is used in conjunction with a layout instrumented for Digitrax Transponding and locos or cars equipped with transponders to find the location of those pieces of rolling stock on the layout.

The L & R Semaphore Indicators are used when cab signaling is implemented on the layout. These semaphores offer three indications:

Each throttle has a bar graph located above the text area of the LCD. Each bar graph indicates the speed setting of the L & R Throttles graphically from a single dot (0% throttle) to 20 dots (full throttle).  This is useful when the text area is showing information other than speed.

The DT400 can be connected directly to the LocoNet port of your command station or to any Universal Panel of your LocoNet system.

DS64 can be used as a LocoNet device. The two RJ12 sockets (above, left) on the back of DS64 are LocoNet Ports for connecting your DS64 to LocoNet.  Either can be used to connect to LocoNet, with the other being used to connect to other LocoNet devices.

You can add a second Zephyr to add more power and an additional throttle on the DCS50 and two additional Jump ports for using DC power packs to control DCC locomotives.  You will need to change Option Switch 02 to c (Closed) on the second (and any additional DCS50s you might choose to add to the layout as well).  The diagram below shows you how to do this.

This is a table of the various DCS50 Programming Displays.  There are four programming methods available in with Zephyr, which are displayed in the left hand column.  The right columns show the display for each type of method:

To stop everything on the layout immediately:Press the POWER key to turn off power to the whole layout. This option will stop everything on the railroad.

QUICK INSTALLATION Notes for users with decoders not made by Digitrax:1. The DCS50 command station operates in 128 speed step mode. If you are using a locomotive with a decoder that does not have 128 step capability you will have to adjust either the decoder or the DCS50 so that both are using the same number of speed steps to communicate. We call this procedure status editing. You can status edit each individual decoder or you can change the DCS50’s system default by setting the DCS50’s Option Switches 21-23 and run all of your decoders with fewer speed steps to ...

Changing Locomotive Direction with DCS50 Zephyr:Move the Direction Control Lever [2] to FORWARD or REVERSE to change the direction of the loco address running on the throttle. To determine the direction of a loco that is not moving, simply look at the position of the lever. You can move the lever quickly past the BRAKE position with no adverse effects. If you change direction while a loco is moving it will slow down to 0 speed and then speed up to the commanded speed according to the decoder’s programmed CV (configurable values) for deceleration and acceleration.

When using Soundtrax Sierra Sound with Digitrax LArge Scale decoders, go to the Soundtrax website and download their SoundTraxx Technical Bulletin #7.  Technical bulletin available at www.soundtraxx.com   Soundtrax is your source for information using their Sierra Sound with Digitrax decoders.

The SuperSonic decoder feature allows you to adjust the PWM (pulse width modulation) frequency of your decoder to reduce the humming noise that is characteristic of the DCC signal.Digitrax decoders that have this feature are shipped with the value set at 000/x00 or maximum PWM.  To change this value, you can set any value from 000/x00 (max) to 255/xFF (min).  Entering a value of "255" will turn this feature off.Use of this feature will make the locomotive run more quietly but will reduce the torque generated by the motor.  Digitrax torque compensation can be used to compensate for this effect.

I want to sit back & watch my railroad run. Can you do that with Digitrax?The Digitrax Command Control System is designed for prototypical operation. The objective is to provide realistic operation so that the models run like the real thing. To do this you need an engineer in control of each locomotive. The starter sets are not designed for automated train control when used by themselves. To set up automated operation, you can set up the layout with detection and or transponding and use a computer to handle the automated operations.

Digitrax transponding works with Digitrax signaling system products. Transponding is not required to operate signaling systems however, the provision of transponding allows the possibility of the signaling system being able to automatically take control of trains that violate a signal aspect. Transponding can also be used to eliminate the "pushy pusher" problem that is characteristic of hardware implemented signal influenced speed control schemes.

Any LocoNet throttle can be used with your WTL12. Simply plug the LocoNet throttle into either LocoNet port on the back of your WTL12 or into any LocoNet or Throttle Jack anywhere on your LocoNet system. If you want to be able to plug in a throttle at a remote location, we recommend using a UP5 Universal Panel.   Your WTL12 can handle up to 6 LocoNet Throttles. If you need to run more than 6 throttles, you can move up to a Digitrax Command Station with additional capacity. You can continue to use your WTL12 as a throttle and ...

The SDXN146K1E decoder is a Series 6, four function decoder.  The decoder already has LEDs configured as the Forward/Reverse Headlight.  There are additional solder pads which will allow you to add functions F1 and F2.  These functions can be programmed to suit your particular needs.  The SDXN146K1E has a built in current limiter that sets output current to approximatly 10ma for the cooresponding + and - pads as shown.  There is also an available Cam Input for sycronized chuffing.  See the Digitrax Decoder Manual for complete function and Cam Input setup instructions.

The SDXN146K4 decoder is a Series 6, four function decoder.  The decoder already has LEDs configured as the Forward/Reverse Headlight.  There are additional solder pads which will allow you to add functions F1 and F2.  These functions can be programmed to suit your particular needs.  The SDXN146K4 has a built in current limiter that sets output current to approximatly 10ma for the cooresponding + and - pads as shown.  There is also an available Cam Input for sycronized chuffing.  See the Digitrax Decoder Manual for complete function and Cam Input setup instructions.

The SDXN146K2 decoder is a Series 6, four function decoder.  The decoder already has LEDs configured as the Forward/Reverse Headlight.  There are additional solder pads which will allow you to add functions F1 and F2.  These functions can be programmed to suit your particular needs.  The SDXN146K2 has a built in current limiter that sets output current to approximatly 10ma for the cooresponding + and - pads as shown.  There is also an available Cam Input for sycronized chuffing.  See the Digitrax Decoder Manual for complete function and Cam Input setup instructions.

What Digitrax decoders work in the new Athearn N scale FP45? We recommend the DN163K1C, following the procedure below. One of our editors was able to successfully install both the Digitrax DN163K1B and DN163K1C decoders in the unit. We have determined that the chassis design requires that the decoder be installed backwards. The only problem this poses is that one additional step has to be taken when programming. Both the DN163K1B and DN163K1C decoders are the same footprint with the exception of the LEDs. The DN163K1B has T-1 3mm LEDs and DN163K1C has surface mount LEDs. When the K1B version ...

I would like to re-power two old Athearn Alco PAs and sandwich a dummy PB in between. I would like to know if is possible /practical to install a sound module in the dummy unit. Actually, there's probably enough room to fit something in the A-units, but you could install sound into the B-unit if there is a way for track power to reach the sound unit. Consider the SoundBug SFX006 which replaces the SFX004): The speaker diameter is 28mm, or just a bit larger than an inch. You will need to fit the speaker into a baffle and the ...

Q: I have a Digitrax DT400 throttle. The left speed knob accelerates the locos at one speed unit per "click". However the right knob accelerates at three speed units per "click". How can I change the right knob to one unit per click? There is not a way to change the clicks to one per unit. Each rotation of a throttle knob on the DT400 series throttle generates 24 clicks.  Digitrax supports 14, 28 and 128 speed step operation in decoders; each click on a DT400 series throttle knob is related proportianally to the number of speed steps used by the decoder. So, for a ...

Hook up for slow motion type turnout machines & crossing gates.Note: Multiple turnout machines of the same type can be operated on a single DS64 output.For example, you can run 2 Tortoise or Switchmaster machines on a single DS64 output.Note: If you find that your turnout is operating “backwards” simply switch the + & - wire connections to achieve correct operation.Note:  The outputs can be configured to drive a grade crossing signal.  See Knowledge Base article.

When I turn the throttle knob, my locomotive quickly changes speed in large increments.A very common common problem is the throttle "jumping" 3 or more steps each time the throttle is turned.  This simply means the system is not set for 128 Speed Steps in that particular address.Earlier decoders, and some less expensive decoders, were set up for 28-speed steps or even 14-speed steps; very early command stations were only capable of handling 28 or 14 speed steps.  Technology has marched on, and most modern systems now operate using 128 Speed Steps.When first turned on, Digitrax systems are set to ...

The OPTN t Key is used to enter the Option Mode to set throttle and system options. It is also used to issue t (thrown) commands when the throttle is in Switch mode.In the case of turnout control:t=thrown, when a "t" command is sent, the turnout is set for the diverging route through the curved leg.

The DZ125 is set up at the factory to control two function outputs. The DZ125 is configured to control the forward and reverse lights on the locomotive through the white lead and yellow lead using Function 0 (F0F-forward and F0R-reverse) for directional lighting. Both function outputs can be easily set up with Digitrax FX3 lighting effects or as standard on/off functions with the following operational qualifiers: 1. Forward or Reverse direction of travel, or 2. Whether F0 is on or off, or 3. Both direction of travel and whether F0 is on or off, or 4. Whether the locomotive is ...

Q: I have the original DCS100 with the old style non-removable wire connectors. What would I gain with a firmware upgrade? A: Early DCS100s that do not access Functions 9 - 12. If you have a DCS100 that you would like to have updated, please send it to the Digitrax Repair Department for updating. This update is a chip change only and the original style connectors will not be changed to the new style connectors. The circuit boards used for the two different connectors are completely different and are not interchangeable. The DCS100 must be sent to us for this ...

The UT4 series, UT4, UT4D & UT4R are "traditional" style throttles.  The UT4s were developed from a specification submitted by Digitras users through the Digitrax Yahoo group. These throttles were designed by operators for operators.  They are also great for beginners because of their intuitive controls and reduced feature set. By not offering all the bells and whistles, beginners can run your railroad without accidentally changing settings that might cause problems.   Works with any LocoNet compatible system   4-Digit addressing   Functions F0 - F12 for lighting and sound decoder operation   Direction switch with center brake position   ...

A TF4 can be used with any decoder that is not transponder equipped to add transponding capability to the loco.  It can also be used in any piece of rolling stock with track pick ups to add transponding.  For example, you could use a TF4 to add transponding and lighting effects to a caboose if it is equipped with track pickups to provide power and signal to the TF4.A TF4 should not be connected to an existing transponder equipped DCC decoder unless the DCC decoder's transponder is disabled. This avoids having 2 transponders responding to the same address in the ...

The BDL168 is designed to be used with power management devices such as PM42. The BDL168 is designed to operate “downstream” of the Digitrax boosters and power management devices. The BDL168 is the "last" device in the chain from booster to power manager to BDL168. It is connected directly to the track detection section. There should be no other connections to any detection section that will draw track power or the detection section will always show occupied. If a device is used to switch off power feeding the BDL168 and the track it is connected to, for example, a PM42 ...

  To run a locomotive, you must first select it.1. Choose which THROTTLE (L or R) you want to use to run a locomotive. Make it the active throttle by turning it a 1/4 turn in either direction or by pressing down on the knob. If there is no active address selected to the throttle, as shown above, SEL will blink to let you know that the throttle is ready to select an address.2. Press the SEL key. The active throttle display will begin flashing the Loco Icon, the last loco address selected on the throttle and the Lo mode ...

The CLOC, "c" Key is used to toggle between displaying and not displaying the current fast clock time. It is also used to issue c (closed) commands when the throttle is in Switch mode.In the case of turnout control:c=closed, when a "c" command is sent, the turnout is set for the main line with routing through the straight leg of the turnout.

  Setting up DS54 for Standard Turnout Reporting The creation of a feedback circuit for standard turnout reporting is simple. Connect a normally open set of contracts attached to the switch machine, a normally open set of contacts of a micro switch monitoring the turnout throw arm, or the normally open contacts of a relay monitoring the switch machine to the common (green) and switch (red) wires to the desired DS54 output circuit. The following two diagrams indicated the two most common switch machine configurations plus the contact configuration for turnout reporting.  Note: The location and type of contacts available for ...

There are two jumpers on the DS52 stationary decoder board. To properly use your DS52 you must be sure these jumpers are in the correct position. The configuration jumper sets whether your DS52 operates slow motion or solenoid type turnout machines. When the jumper is open it will run solenoid turnout machines. When it is closed it will operate slow motion turnout machines. The programming jumper determines whether the DS52 is in programming mode or not. To program the addresses for the DS52 the program jumper must be closed. For normal operation, it must be open. 

1) Remove locomotive shell following Roundhouse instructions.2) There are two large diodes, one on each side of the rectangular light board. Remove them.3) The two LEDs are wired to this light board, one on each side with black and gray wires on each LED. Reverse the black and gray wires on the board from each LED (gray to where black was and black to where gray was.4) Remove the dummy eight pin plug and insert the eight pin DCC medium plug of a Digitrax DZ1xxPS decoder with the orange wire going to #1 on the light board.5) Reinstall locomotive shell.FAILURE ...

My club uses UT4R radio throttles. At the end of the session they ask that the battery be reversed in the throttle housing to "extend battery life". This effectively reverses the polarity of the battery in the throttle. Is this step necessary? Is there any drain on the battery when the throttle is not in use? If there is a drain, should the battery then be removed for storage? So my question is: How should you store a UT4R so as not to drain the battery when the throttle is not being used? The throttle batteries will indeed drain if ...

The DH165L0 decoder F0F and F0R headlight functions are factory configured with an onboard current regulator for the factory-installed low voltage bulbs (or LEDs) when using a maximum DCC track voltage of up to 16Volts. To bypass the current regulator and use 12V to 16V lamps with the DH165L0 on F0F and F0R, bridge each of the two pair of solder pads as shown on the back side of the decoder in the figure below. The circuit board is marked with F and R adjacent to the soldering points. Bridge between the two F points for a higher voltage bulb ...

Prior to Disassembly Test the Decoder All Digitrax decoders are tested for proper operation before they leave the factory, but sometimes strange things happen. Therefore to insure your decoder is covered under our warranty policy, please give it a thorough test BEFORE you cut the wires. Test Run the Locomotive Be sure it runs correctly in both directions with no unusual noises or binding in the motor-gear train. If it checks out OK, then: Get Ready Before you start, get your tools and supplies together for this project. You will need the following items: DECODER TESTER - Such as the ...

The individual signal heads are connected to the SE8C with 10 conductor ribbon cables. Depending upon which way you assemble the ribbon cables, Pin 1 can be either the brown colored conductor (called Phase A) or the black colored conductor (called Phase B). To maintain your sanity it seems easiest to be consistent when choosing either conductor, but there is no "wrong" answer. In the example below, the ribbon cable is being set up using the brown cable as Pin 1, thus it is being configured as "Phase A" The table below shows the various connections which result when setting up ...

This application note shows how you can use your Digitrax PR2 Programmer with the USB Port on your computer. The PR2 has been replaced by PR3 Programmer and Computer Interface.  PR3 offers USB connectivity.The PR2 Programmer is a serial device that connects to a computer via a 25pin serial port. Serial ports are not available on most computers in current production. USB ports are more widely used today. The Digitrax PR2 Programmer can be connected to a USB port by using a USB to Serial RS-232 DB-25 Adapter Cable. Caution: Not all cables on the market will work. One that ...

It is important to realize that the standard only covers the communication protocol on the track.  As long as it is not extended further than the basic track level communications for train control, creativity will be encouraged rather than stifled. This protocol is very basic and does not require any particular hardware. The Digitrax Complete Train Control System incorporates the DCC protocols for interoperability reasons but has not been held back by them.  Digitrax has developed and marketed automatic reversing boosters, decoders with 128 speed steps and user customizable speed tables, mobile decoders with onboard functions and lighting effects, stationary decoders with sophisticated ...

If you are operating in a show environment where there are other model railroads operating which use Digitrax wireless throttles, you must insure that your railroad's LocoNet ID is different from others that are also present. Your throttle will log on to the LocoNet ID offered by compatible infrared or radio receiver it sees when plugged in to LocoNet. The default LocoNet ID is 00. It may be necessary to change the LocoNet ID if more than one club is operating in close proximity at a train show so that the commands sent by one club will not interfere with ...

Q: If my layout is experiencing short because of a thrown switch, how can you reset the switch using DCC? Many Digitrax operators use the PM42 Power Manager, which provides protection to four power sub-districts. One segment of the PM42 is used to control track switch power, with the balance being used for train power. When the inevitable happens and a train runs into a thrown switch, resulting in a short, the PM42 shuts down the track power in that segment, while the track switch power is maintained, allowing you to throw the offending switch. Because the PM42 isolates only ...

If the function you want to operate does not respond, check the following:1. Is Track Status [4] on? If not press the POWER key to turn it on. 2. Did you select the correct loco? If not, select it now.3. Is the function you want to use installed in the loco? If not, you may need to install it. Most new locos have a head lamp/backup lamp installed, but most do not have any additional lights or sounds installed.4. Change the position of the Direction Control Lever and see if the lamp comes on in the other direction. If the ...

Track Power IndicatorThis very small star shaped dot located just above the bar graph display in the LCD on the right side indicates the status of the track power.No indicator = System track power is OFFIndicator On Steady = System track power is ONBlinking Indicator = System is in “STOP” and track power is ON Tetherless IndicatorThe tetherless indicator shows when your throttle is using either infrared or radio communications.L and R Semaphores-Cab SignalingThe L and R Semaphores are used when cab signaling is implemented on the layout. The L and R Semaphores will display the following:

When you are programming decoders, there are a few error messages you may encounter.There are many causes for these error messages but most can be solved by checking the following:1. Be sure the programming track is connected properly to the DCS50.2. Be sure a decoder is correctly installed in the locomotive with all motor and pick up connections made correctly.3. Be sure the loco with decoder correctly installed is making electrical contact with the programming track and that it remains in contact with the programming track until programming is complete.  Check to see if the track is clean and the ...

The DN163K2 will fit into the Kato RS2 and RSC2 locomotives with the same frame design. Installation for the Kato N scale SD90/43MAC is also similar.  Kapton tape should be applied in the saddle area of the frame above the motor to prevent shorting. Install the DN163K2 decoder into the frame by tilting it slightly as you insert the front corners into the forward frame clips. Press the decoder motor clips down over the motor contacts and slide the decoder board forward and press the board down into the frame. Be careful not to bend the motor contacts or let ...

Q:  My Atlas DCC N-Scale locomotives that are equipped with factory installed Lenz062xf, Lenz063xf or 'new' Atlas decoders will not program using the DCS50 in any mode, either on the OPS track or Program track. I know the system works because I can easily program every Digitrax decoder loco that I have, but if I put an Atlas DCC factory loco on the programming track I get the 'd nd' error code   There are decoders now presnt in the market that do not draw enough current for the programming track to reliably detect that they are present, hence the ...

SW01 to SW08 are inputs that allow a local switch mounted on the layout to operate the slow motion turnout machine. For example, SW01 when connected to the +VE sensor common (Pin 2 in figure) will reverse the voltages on SMTM1A and SMTM1B to change the position of turnout 1. SW02 controls local turnout 2 , etc. For each connection to +VE sensor common the slow motion turnout machine swaps direction and a Switch message is sent to LocoNet to report the new position of the turnout. This local control can be disconnected by setting OpSw 15 to closed, in ...

The DN163K2 will fit into the Kato RS2 and RSC2 locomotives with the same frame design. The decoder is also installed using these same steps in the SD90/43MAC. Kapton tape should be applied in the saddle area of the frame above the motor to prevent shorting. Install the DN163K2 decoder into the frame by tilting it slightly as you insert the front corners into the forward frame clips. Press the decoder motor clips down over the motor contacts and slide the decoder board forward and press the board down into the frame. Be careful not to bend the motor contacts ...

1. Carefully remove the locomotive’s shell from the frame. Notice the orientation of the shell to the frame so that you can reinstall correctly. 2. Remove the 6 pin analog shorting plug and in its place insert the DZ125IN/DZ126IN decoder with the correct pin-1 orientation. (There also is a small numeral "1" on the bottom of the DZ125IN near pin-1.) The DZ125IN has 6 pins that insert directly into the 6 pin socket (NEM 651 type) on the locomotive’s PCB. The DZ125’s small size allows the decoder to be easily installed in a variety of European locomotives. For the Kato ...

Installing the TF4 in the Loco or Rolling Stock1. Connect the TF4's RED and BLACK wires to the matching RED and BLACK track feed wires of an installed DCC mobile decoder.2. If the TF4 is used by itself, for example in a caboose or box car without a DCC mobile decoder installed, connect the TF4's RED wire to the right hand track pickup and the TF24s BLACK wire to the left side track pickup.3. No other parts are required to set up the transponder current pulses, since this is self-contained in the TF4.4. Install the lamps using the TF4's blue, ...

Most intermittent operation faults on all layouts, not only DCC ones, are caused by bad electrical connections and poor wheel pickups on locomotives.  Poor electrical contact causes problems with sound decoder operation in particular.  Sound decoder installations usually include a capacitor to store energy to keep the sound going when the decoder briefly loses electrical contact.   When the track is dirty or corroded, it can't transmit the electricity and DCC signal needed to run locomotives.  When the locomotive pick ups are dirty or corroded, they can't pick up the signal from the track.  Check your track cleanliness and quality of wheel pickups ...

Is it possible to connect my BDL168 across two power districts (Boosters). I envisage using zone 1 & 2, with detection sections 1-8 one one booster (DCS100), with zones 3 & 4, with detection sections 9-16 on another booster (DB150). Will this work? Please refer to the chart below: Note that Pins 1 & A, 6 & F, 13 & P, and 18 & V are identified as "Connection to Booster for Zone *. Each Zone can support up to four detection sections. So, for your application, the DCS100 would be connected to Pins 1 & A and 6 & ...

The DCS50’s LED Display is made up of 4 digits/letters on the main part of the screen and 4 Indicator Dots across the top of the screen.  When you are running a locomotive, you will see the address of that locomotive in the display and the Function Indicator Dot will be lit. This means that the throttle knob will control speed, the direction lever will control direction and braking and the number keys will control the functions on the locomotive. You will see the following display if you are running loco address 1873 on your local throttle.The LCD has three ...

My question is: How do I mount the PM42? Do I need a special housing in order to mount it under table? It appears to me that mounting it flush against a surface would prevent, or make it extremely difficult, to attach the 44-pin connector. Digitrax manufactures three devices which have a 44-pin connector. These are the BDL168 (and its predecessor the BDL16), the SE8C and the PM42 (and its predecessor, the PM4). These best approach to mounting these devices is to screw the connector directly to the wiring panel board. Drill mounting holes in the end of the 44-pin ...

This H0-scale railroad track plan first appeared in the Atlas Model Railroad Company's book "Six Railroads You Can Build", written by John Armstrong and illustrated by Tad Stepek. This book was first published in 1958 and has been reprinted several times. A classic bowl of spaghetti, the Transbay Interwoven has two reversing loops and a turntable. DC Control For DC operation, Atlas specified three Atlas Controllers (for the reverse loops and the turntable), two Atlas Selectors (to control eight track segments) and ten controllers for the railroad's turnouts. DCC Makes Things Simple With DCC, the wiring of this railroad is ...

I would like to use a Tomar Searchlight Signal such as model # 858. It has three color LED for each head. The SE8C manual shows the wiring example for bi-color LED signals. Is the SE8C able to control the three color LED signals as well? The bi-pole LED's can be used to produce a yellow "Approach" indication. The SE8C sends an AC signal to the LED, alternately lighting both the red and green sides to make a yellow (or "amber") Indication. Please see below: "A2" is connected to produce an approach (yellow) indication. You may find that the yellow ...

I have a 4x8 layout, I want to run 2 or 3 trains. I will operate the layout by myself or with possibly one other operator. It's a really basic operation. Which Digitrax set is best for me?The Zephyr Xtra Set will probably do what you want. You will need the Zephyr Set and mobile decoders for the locomotives. You can connect up to 20 throttles to your Zephyr Xtra Set so that adding another operator is as simple as plugging in another throttle. You can also use one or two smooth DC power packs as throttles for additional operators to run trains ...

In addition to controlling turnouts via LocoNet with your DT400 throttle or with a computer program such as Railroad & Co., you can use local push buttons to operate turnouts. These buttons can be mounted near a particular turnout on the layout fascia or on a local track diagram. In this way, train crews can operate a turnout with a push of the button. The momentary push buttons are connected to the DS64 inputs marked S1, S2, S3 and S4. The return connection of each push button is made to "+COM. Here, a momentary button is connected to operate Turnout ...

The DN163M0 is set up at the factory to control six functions. The unit is prewired with one golden-white LED (shown in figure below) for the headlight and set up as Function 0 (F0F-forward). Function outputs F0F/Yellow, F1/Green, F2/Violet, F3/Brown and F4/White/Yellow are available on the decoder and can be used by soldering wires from the pads indicated to the lights (or other functions) you wish to control. CAUTION: When adding function wires, be very careful that the wires you add do not come into contact with any other pads or components on the board where they might create a ...

The NMRA has already adopted a set of recommended practices for standardized sockets and plugs in N, HO, and Large scales. Many new HO locomotives are being made with this socket. Any command control manufacturer is free to make a decoder or other device that will plug into this socket whether it is a DCC decoder or not. In addition Digitrax makes board replacement decoders for many HO models to make installation even simpler.The N-scale socket and plug arrangement that was adopted is based on a European design that works well for many European locomotives.  Unfortunately, this design does not work in some US ...

Kato and Digitrax recommend the best DCC performance with the Unitrack turnout requires that you set each #4 turnout to "Non-power-routing".  You can do this by changing the position of the screw that sets power routing which is located on the bottom of each #4 turnout.  There are two screw adjustments on a Unitrack turnout, one for making the turnout non-power routing and the other being for setting either "live" or "insulated" frog (the point where the two rails cross)l  Leave the frog screw in the "insulated" position.It should be noted that some N-scale Unitrack production has the routing/non-routing connections mislabeled, with the English-language ...

"I had two Proto 1000 RDC's that I wanted to convert. After opening up the first one, I did what I usually do, yanked out all the circuit boards and such, threw them over my shoulder and commenced to hardwiring the decoder into the unit. Everything went fine, and I took it with me to a friend's railroad to enjoy what I had done. After I got there and played a bit, my friend commented that wasn't it neat that the Proto 1000 series has wiring connections on the circuit board in the locomotive, making things considerably easier. Wiring points?" ...

I have a small switching layout, I am interested in low-end speed control and want to control turnouts from the hand held. What components do I need?All Digitrax command staions offer excellent low-end speed control as long as you are using decoders capable of 28/128 speed step operation.  Low speed performance will also be affected by how you set up the CVs in the decoder to define how the specific locomotive will respond to system commands.  Remember that installing a DCC deocder will not automatically improve the operation of your locos, you will need to first make sure they run ...

The master volume control CV is CV58, its values range from 0 to 15.  The factory default value for this is 09.Digitrax SFX decoders have a factory default value of 09 set for CV58.  This works well for 32 ohm speakers.The decoder will reset to this value whenever you do a decoder reset of CV8=8. Digitrax SFX decoders built for use with 8 ohm speakers should have this value changed to 4 or 5 for best operation value of 4 or 5, since the decoder may not supply enough current at high volume/drive levels.Your results may also depend upon track voltage present. Kato USA says ...

Digitrax Command Stations use three address ranges available for addressing and programming locomotives. You can use all three address ranges at any time and in any combination you choose.Address 00: The analog address used to run locomotives without decoders. All analog locos (those with no decoders) active on the layout will respond to the speed and direction commands issued to address 00.2 digit addressing: Addresses in the range of 01 through 127. Also called short addressing, 2 digit addressing can be used with any DCC decoder, shown as the two or three digits, with no leading zero, of the address ...

Once you have set up the DS64 to operate the type of turnouts you will use, the next step is to hook up the turnouts to the outputs of the DS64. Each type of turnout machine has specific requirements for wiring.Note: The DS64 is configured for either for solenoid turnouts (the default setting)  OR slow motion turnouts. Only one type of turnout motor can be used on any particular DS64.Note: Multiple turnout machines can be operated on a single DS64 output.For example, you can run 2 Peco or Atlas Snap Switches on a single DS64 output. Up to 4 Kato ...

Most HO, N & Z Scale model locomotive motors and lamps are designed by the locomotive manufacturers to operate at full speed at 12 volts DC on the track. Digitrax recommends running your DCC command station and boosters at the lowest track voltage possible that provides acceptable operation. The “N Scale (12V)” setting on Digitrax equipment works for most HO, N & Z scale layouts. Some DCC systems made by other companies supply more voltage to the track and are not adjustable. If the track voltage applied exceeds the operating parameters of the locomotive and its lamps, it is possible ...

The installation will be in the tender of the Con-Cor 4-8-4 locomotive. 1. Carefully remove the tender’s shell from the frame. 2. Remove the factory installed DCC dummy plug. (See photo below) 3. Insert the DN143IP medium plug pins in the socket. Pin 1 will be the bottom right socket when viewed. (See photo below) 4. Replace the tender shell. It may be necessary to trim the underside of the tender top to allow it to snap into place. 5. You are now ready to run your locomotive. The DN143IP is factory programmed to address 03. You can easily customize ...

The DB150 has 22 “Slots” for locomotive addresses The DB150 command station can run up to 22 loco addresses and throttles at a time. Each of these addresses occupies one of 22 “slots” available in the DB150’s memory. Once those 22 slots are full the system will display the “slot=max” message to let you knot that you need to release some locos if you want to select and run others. The DB150 manages the addresses that occupy slots by assigning different statuses to each decoder depending on how it is being used in the system. This allows the DB150 to ...

The DT402/DT402 series throttles have displays which give you information about the performance of your railroad.The decoder address selected on the L Throttle is displayed on the bottom line of the LCD to the left of the Mode Indicator. The decoder address selected on the R Throttle is displayed on to the right of the Mode Indicator. The address can show as either the 2-digit or the 4-digit decoder address. If no address is selected the display will show “SEL.” If a 2-digit address is selected (00-127), the display will show two or three digits. If a 4-digit address is ...

The DT402 Throttle will control up to 29 functions in walkaround and radio modes. When operating in IR Mode the DT402 series throttles will control up to 9 functions (F0-F8). The numeric keypad is always active in the normal Fn operation mode. The functions that are currently on for the active loco will be displayed on the top line of the DT402 display. The following figure shows an example of how the display looks when functions 0 and 1 are turned on for loco 1652 on the R Throttle. Controlling Functions F0-F12 1. Determine which throttle you want to control ...

One special feature on the Texas & Southwestern is a built-in programming track. The programming track is located in a short section of track in the small engine terminal of the T&SW. This track has both rails insulated from the rest of the railroad. It uses a Double Pole Double Throw (DPDT) toggle switch to select what purpose this section of track is used for. When the toggle switch is set in one direction, the track has DCC power on it. When the toggle switch is aligned in the other direction, the track is now connected to the programming terminals ...

The factory setting for Op#3 for all DT300 throttles is Op#3=x01.LCD Backlight Brightness SettingThe backlight intensity can be set for off, low, medium or high intensity. The brightness of the backlight affects battery life, the brighter the LCD, the shorter the battery life.Note: When the DT300 is untethered, the backlight automatically reduces brightness by one setting to conserve battery power.Fast Clock FormatThe fast clock can be set up to display either 12 hour format or 24 hour format. The factory setting is 12 hour format.Recall Stack DepthThe DT300 recall feature can be set to keep a list of the last ...

Our thanks go to Digitrax operator Aksel Suarez of Chesapeake, Virginia for sending this tip on how to install a Digitrax decoder in the Walthers GP15, called by some prototype railroaders a "Geepette" or "Cheep Geep". Use a DH165A0 decoder to replace the existing light board. Remove the plastic clips that hold the wires to the light board. Once the light board has been removed, place a piece of electrical tape on the metal frame to isolate the decoder from the frame and prevent a short circuit. The wires on the locomotive to the motor and lights do not follow ...

What is the difference between Simplex and Duplex wireless operations and what are the advantages of each?The Digitrax DT400R, DT402R and UT4R throttles operate at the 916.5Mhz radio frequency.  These throttles both use the UR91 for radio communication.  The DT402D and UT4D operate at 2.4Ghz.  They require the UR92 for radio communication. The move to Duplex is meant to improve radio operations and add radio range.  Simplex (UR91) and Duplex (UR92) can operate on the same layout without any issues or interference with each otherWith duplex radio: You’ll select and run your locomotives without plugging in.   You'll dispatch locomotives ...

UT4 Function Control Keys and How they WorkThere are 8 physical keys used to control functions F0-F12 on the UT4 throttle. F1 through F6 and F7-F12 share the same keys.  You will see F1-F6 in black print and F7-F12 in blue print to remind you that you will need to use the SHIFT key to access F7-F12. To use functions F7-F12 you must press and hold down the SHIFT key on the lower left row of the throttle as you press the F7 through F12 keys to activate any functions available on those functions. All the UT4 functions work like other Digitrax throttles. ...

How do I add a heatsink to my BDL162 for large scale operations?The BDL162 design does not include a provision for a heatsink. There is not a kit available for adding on a heatsink, but you can make your own if you believe it necessary for your system. The following drawing will provide the correct measurements to produce a heatsink that will slip in between the two rows of rectifiers on the BDL162 Circuit Board. This will raise the current handling capacity but we do not know by how much.Cut the heatsink from .05" thick aluminum or brass sheet stock, ...

  My Atlas DCC N-Scale locomotives that are equipped with factory installed Lenz062xf, Lenz063xf decoders will not program using any mode on Program track. I know the system works because I can easily program every Digitrax decoder loco that I have, but if I put an Atlas DCC factory loco on the programming track I get the 'd nd' error code.   There are decoders now present in the market that do not draw enough current for the programming track to reliably detect that they are present, hence the error report of "d-nd". All you have to do is to ...

How do I Increase BDL162 Detection Section Threshold SensitivityThe BDL162 has Option Switch settings to control detection sensitivity. The factory setting is OpSw19=t for a threshold sense for DCC occupancy of approximately 22 Kohms minimum. Changing OpSw19=c will set the threshold to 10 Kohm minimum. See the BDL162 instruction manual for details on setting the Option Switches. These settings will accommodate most layouts, though there may be circumstances when a higher threshold is desired, for example, in a high moisture environment or with G scale operations outside.To raise the threshold even further resistors can be added into the wiring between ...

The UR92 ships from the factory with the default Duplex Group default radio channel set to 11. You can select channels 11 through 26 for the radio channel. 1. Plug a DT402D throttle into the UR92. 2. Press the EXIT key. 3. Press the OPTN key then the EDIT key. 4. Press the Y / + key to increase the channel number, or 5. Press the N/- key to decrease the channel number. In the example below, we have changed the Group name to JBS&J RR and entered 21 for the channel number. 6. Repeat step 4 or 5 until ...

How do I connect a BD4 to a DS64? The BD4 is a block occupancy detection device designed as an add-on device that can take advantage of the LocoNet hosting capability of the DS64 stationary decoder. It is connected in this way: The installation of a BD4 is relatively simple. Looking at the BD4, you will find a 5-point terminal block on one end and two (LED1 and DS1) 10-pin (5x2) headers on the other. There are three termination areas: a) The 5-point terminal block (left) is for the interconnection between the rail power source and the rails. b) The ...

Configuring the Duplex Group Password The UR92 ships from the factory with the default Duplex Group Password of 0000, the value that disables password requirements. You may have an occasion when operating in a multisystem environment when you may want to restrict access to your layout and operating system via a tetherless Duplex Throttle. The password for your Duplex Group may be activated or changed: 1. Plug a DT402D or DT500D throttle into the UR92. 2. Press the EXIT key. 3. Press the OPTN key then the EDIT key. 4. Enter a 4-digit number using the numbers on the keypad ...

The DN163A0 is set up at the factory to control six functions. The unit is prewired with two golden-white LEDs set up for directional lighting as F0F/F0F+ for the front light and F0R/F0R+ for the rear light. Functions F1 (Green), F2 (Violet), F3 (Brown) and F4 (White/Yellow) can be used by soldering a wire from the pad for the function you wish to use to the lamp (or other function) you wish to control. The wire colors indicated are the standard color code used in the industry (you can use any color you like). These colors are important if you ...

Q: I have an older Super Chief system that came with DT100 throttles. They are both shot; one was accidentally pulled apart by an over zealous operator who forgot about the cable length and the other was ruined by me (I'm ashamed to admit) by spilling some super glue on several of the buttons. Can I upgrade to the current throttles or do you recommend I purchase the old DT100 units? A:  All Digitrax Starter Sets have LocoNet, including your older Chief series unit. This means that you can use any Digitrax throttle past and present.  Both of your damaged DT100 ...

Since 1999, Digitrax has produced function-only decoders with Transponding capabilities.  These decoders make it easy to add transponding and additional functions to locomotives with decoders that do not have transponding or enough functions.  These are useful for customers with older decoders produced before transponding was incorporated into Digitrax decoders.  They are also useful for users of decoders made by manufacturers that do not support transponding.The TF1 is a single output function decoder with Transponding capabilities. This function decoder adds an additional function along with Transponding ID capabilities to an engine with non-Transponding decoder capabilities or adds a single function along ...

I still don't understand the bus stuff. Wires come from the command or booster and run under the track layout and have feeders coming off. I understand these feeders connect to the track. Where do you connect the wires coming from the power source? (ie: Zephyr) Is there a particular place on the track layout it is to connect to?The power connection for the command station and boosters is directly between the power supply and these units.  It is not connected to the track!  Please see the diagram below: In this case, the Zephyr is the Command Station and Booster ...

While it is possible to use RJ12 telco jacks as throttle jacks on LocoNet, the UP5 is much simpler to use and looks much more professional on the front of the layout. The UP5 is shipped as a kit that must be assembled.  You will need to attach the front panel to the circuit board using the screws provided as shown below before installing the entire unit on your layout.  If your front panel does not fit at a "perfect" 90 degree angle to the circuit board, this is will not affect the functionality of the unit.Make sure to line up the Track ...

The BDL168 does not require a heatsink to operate efficiently, however, large scale operations may generate higher heat levels with the BDL168 and you can make your own to add to the unit. The BDL168 design does not include a provision for a heatsink. There is not a kit available for adding on a heatsink, but you can make your own if you believe it necessary for your system. The following drawing will provide the correct measurements to produce a heatsink that will slip in between the two rows of rectifiers on the BDL168 Circuit Board. This will raise the ...

The MODE and SCALE switches are used to configure the DCS100 for your railroad. The 3 MODE switch settings are:  RUN is for normal operations. OP is used to customize the DCS100 by changing its option switch settings. SLEEP is used to shutdown the system and all throttles that are plugged in to the system. SCALE Switch (O/G HO N) This switch sets the maximum track voltage limit. 1. Set the DCS100's SCALE switch to the scale you are running (N, HO, O\G). Use the lowest setting (N, HO, or O/G) that will run your layout. 2. Set the MODE switch ...

Stealing A Locomotive AddressDigitrax systems do not allow more than one user to select and run the same locomotive address unless the loco is “stolen” (or shared) by the new user. When an address is receiving commands from more than one throttle, it may seem to be out of control.Stealing is a safety interlock that prevents operators from automatically taking control of locos that are already selected and being run on another throttle. Occasionally you may need to override this interlock to gain control of a loco. This override is called stealing and will result in having a single loco ...

The track power indicator on your DT400 shows whether track power is on or off. If the track power indicator is lit then track power is on. There is also a Track Power indicator on your command station.To Turn Track Power On:If the Track Power Indicator is not lit, turn track power on as follows:1.  Press the PWR Key2.  Press the Y + Key and the Track Power Indicator on your DT400 display and on your command station will come on solid. If the Track Power Indicator is blinking, press the Y+ Key again to make it solid and turn ...

The DN163K1D is set up at the factory to control six functions. The unit is prewired with two white LED's set up for directional lighting as F0F/F0F+ for the front light and F0R/F0R+ for the rear light. Functions F1 (Green), F2 (Violet), F3 (Brown) and F4 (White/Yellow) can be used by soldering a wire from the pad for the function you wish to use to the lamp (or other function) you wish to control. The wire colors indicated are the standard color code used in the industry (you can use any color you like). These colors are important if you ...

How does DCC work? You use a throttle (cab) to tell the system what you want a train to do. The throttle sends the information to the command station. The command station makes a digital packet out of the information and sends it to the booster. The booster* adds power to the digital packet and sends it out through the rail. The decoders in all locomotives (even those that are not running) read all digital packets, and decipher them to get the address contained in the data packet. If the packet address matches the decoder address, the decoder uses the ...

DT400 Series Throttles - Make F2 Latching or Non-latching The F2 button on the DT400 is meant to control locomotive whistles and horns, so it is configured to be "momentary" or non-latching.  This means that the key will activate the horn or other function for as long as you hold the key down and stop when it is released. This was done to facilitate the use of a playable whistle in sound decoders. If you are not using F2 for this purpose on your layout, you can change the way the F2 key on the throttle works so that it latches on and ...

How To Turn Track Power On and Off with the DT400 series throttle Turn track power on: Press the PWR Key, then press the Y + Key and the Track Power Indicator on your DT400 series display and on your command station will come on solid. If the track power indicator is blinking, press the Y+ key again to make it solid. Turn track power off: Press the PWR Key , then press the N - Key . The Track Power Indicator on your DT400 series and on your command station will go off. To Exit: Exit PWR mode by pressing the ...

Braking sections are sections of track which will cause a DCC equipped locomotive to stop automatically. The simplest way to do this is to set up a track section where the power is turned off. This has two disadvantages. First, since there is no power, the locomotive lights will be off when the train is stopped in the section. Second, the lead loco in a consist stops as soon as it hits the dead section. Other locos in the consist will push the dead loco forward. In a long consist, you could get a situation where the last loco in ...

  This example is a small yard with a crossing signal at its entrance. We will use independent turnout addresses to demonstrate the flexibility that the DS64 offers. Here, route (track) 2 3 and 4 will activate the blinking light when set and the deactivation is done by resetting to route 1, the main line. The advantage of this setup is that you can easily do operating RR Crossing lights without the need for additional equipment for block detection. The turnout output utilized for the RR crossing operation is simply integrated into the route setup. In addition to the route ...

In response to a request, here is a semi-official track plan of the Texas & Southwestern: The railroad uses Kato Unitrack: 249mm radius curves 282mm radius curves Seven #4 Right turnouts, configured to be "non current routing" Five #4 Left turnouts, configured to be "non current routing" Two 90° crossings A variety of straight tracks, including the 20-091 Short Track Assortment Three 20-050 Adjustment Tracks Several 24-818 Terminal joiners to supply power to the railroad and to connect the AR1 to the reversing segment Insulated Unijoiners were used to define the reversing segment. Alert readers will note that the tracks ...

Since each system, no matter how large, needs only one command station, you need only one WTL12 (or other Digitrax Command Station) performing this function. Any additional WTL12s must be converted to a booster by following the startup directions described below: Disconnect the power from the WTL12 unit Press and Hold the VOL- key Reconnect the power while continuing to hold the VOL- key Release the VOL- key The WTL12 is now configured as a booster/throttle only.  The power button will be lit up red on the right side. The command station determines the total number of locomotive addresses your ...

Use a throttle to change the PM42's Option Switches 01, 02 and 09 as detailed in the PM42 instruction manual. The PM42's trip current threshold can be set at a value from 1.5amps to 12 amps. Always use the lowest possible setting, consistent with good operation and reliable short circuit detection and recovery. Higher current settings are not "better." We ship the PM42 with a moderate current trip threshold of 3amps so it will work on most DCC boosters and layouts with no changes.This is because some boosters cannot supply enough current with the track feeder resistance to reliably allow ...

Case Study - Texas & Southwestern The Texas & Southwestern is a small N-Scale model railroad that features a Zephyr. Here are a variety of short articles which detail the various facets of the construction and operation of this railroad. Background-Part 2 The idea behind the railroad. The Railroad-Part 3 Planning the railroad Track Plan- Part 4 Powering the Railroad-Part 5 Zephyr makes things easy. Wiring the Railroad-Part 6 Hooking things up for reliable operation. Reverse Loop-Part 7 AR1 makes things easy, but a little change in thinking is sometimes necessary. Programming Track- Part 8 A convenient feature. Zephyr Heat Problem- ...

1. Disconnect the wire harness from the LT1.2. Plug one end of the LocoNet cable being tested into the LT1.3. Connect the other end to the cable into on of the LocoNet ports on your DCS50. Make sure the Track Status Indicator Dot is lit.4. All four LEDs on the LT1 will light if the cable is good. LEDs may not all be the same brightness, this is normal. NOTE: Only three LEDs will light if the Track Status Indicator Dot is not lit.5. If any of the LEDs fail to light, recrimp the plugs on the LocoNet cable and ...

If Zephyr DCS50/DCS51’s display shows FuLL this means that it has reached the limit of 10 (20 for the Zephyr Xtra) locomotive addresses that it can manage at one time. If you want to select additional addresses, you will need to release one or more loco addresses before you will be able to select other locomotives to run.The DCS50/DCS51 runs a “purging” routine that helps eliminate addresses that have not been used for a period of time to make slots available for running other addresses.If you see this "FuLL" message while you are operating, you can release locos that you ...

The DCS50 Zephyr normally treats Function 3 as an on/off function unless you set it up as a non-latching function like Function 2. This means that F3 can be used either as a normal function operating as an "On / Off" switch, or to control a function that only requires a momentary activation like some couplers.To set up Function 3 as a non-latching function, set the DCS50’s Option Switch 6 to closed as follows:1. Press the PROG key. The last programming mode used by the DCS50 will be displayed.2. Press the SWITCH key. The display shows the last switch used ...

Trains run on two rail track.  When a train needs to change to a different or diverging track a track feature called a turnout, switch, track switch, points, frog or other name comes in to play.  The function of this track feature is to move the rails so that the train can change tracks.  When the turnout is "closed" the train will go straight through and when it is "thrown" it will go on the diverging track.   Railroad employees in North America call this track feature a switch. They call the moving parts of the switch the points.  They ...

Overview: Broadway Limited has issued a new line of H0-Scale locomotives called "Blueline". These locomotives are equipped with sound decoders that can be operated in a conventional Direct Current environment. They also are fitted with an 8-pin DCC Medium plug to allow for conversion to a DCC operating environment. Among other decoders, Broadway Limited recommends using our DN143IP mobile decoder for this purpose. Converting these locomotives is simple, but programming a 4 digit address can be a challenge. BLI has a support page which indicates that changing the locomotive address and other CV's can be done in OPS Mode (also ...

The Track Power indicator on your DT402 display shows the track power status. There is also a Track Status light on your Command Station. If the track power indicator is lit then track power is on. To turn the track power on or off: 1. Press the PWR key on the DT402. You will see a screen similar to the one below. You will now be able to toggle the track power on/off: 2. Press the N/- key to toggle the track power off. The Track Power Indicator on your DT402 and on your Command Station will go off. 3. ...

  Q:  What is the basic configuration and Option Switch (OpSw) settings for each of the four sections of the PM42 when configured for automatic reverse section control? A:  The PM42 is a 4 section multi-purpose device where each of the four sections can be individually configured to act as either a circuit breaker, or auto-reverse section controller or DPDT relay. When configured as an auto-reverse section controller, the PM42 adjusts the rail phasing of the reversing section it controls whenever a locomotive, or car with metal wheels, bridges the gaps between the rails of that reverse section and an adjacent non-reversing section ...

There are many transformers and power packs that can supply input power for Digitrax boosters & command stations. Most regular DC train control packs do not have enough power to supply the full power potential of the a 5 or 8 amp booster, since they were designed to only run 1 locomotive in a blocked system. To get the full power potential of your booster, you must use a power supply that can supply enough power. Check with your local Digitrax dealer to see which transformers are available. If you are using a Zephyr Xtra, please use ONLY the power supply ...

Problems occurring on most auto reversing sections are a result of improper wiring or gapping. Digitrax auto reversing units such as the PM42 or AR1 require a "hard" short which means there must be good current flow to both sides of the gaps, on the reversing section side and on the "normal" side. Our experience has been that over 90% of reversing section problems are a result of improper wiring or improper gaps. Another 5% is a result of improperly wired or configured auto reversing units. It is poor practice to put the gaps immediately behind a switch (turnout in ...

The Mode Switch: The Mode Switch next to the Green LED is used to toggle back and forth between MS-100 mode and PR2 Programmer Mode. The Green LED will wink once per second if in the MS-100 Mode or toggle every second when in the PR2 sound programming mode. The Loconet Termination Switch: The switch next to the error LED is used only in MS-100 mode to activate the Loconet current source termination feature. This switch is active ONLY when a command station is NOT connected to the Loconet and the red LED is solid on indicating there is no ...

Most Digitrax mobile decoders have a global reset function, which returns the decoder's CVs to their factory default settings.This is useful if the CV values in a particular decoder have been changed with less than wonderful results. For example, you may have accidentally set the CV value for acceleration so that the engine won't move for minutes when issued a speed command. This makes it look like the decoder is not working when all it needs is to have the CV value for acceleration reset. Many of the decoders that are sent to us for repair just need to have ...

The UR92 is simple to install and begin using in your new or current layout. 1. In most cases a UR92 should be situated near the physical center of a layout and will typically cover a circle of about 300+ feet (~100 meters) across, which will be adequate for most layouts. Some layouts may require additional UR92s for adequate signal coverage. 2. Connect the PS14 DC power supply to UR92 via the DC power jack on the side. The green and red LEDs should blink and then the red LED should stay on. 3. Connect the UR92 to your working LocoNet ...

The DH163 series decoders are set up at the factory to control six function outputs. The DH163 is configured to control the forward and reverse lights on the locomotive through the white lead and yellow lead using Function 0 (F0F-forward and F0R-reverse) for directional lighting. Functions F1(Green) and F2 (Violet) are part of the harness for easy hookup. F3 and F4 are also available on the decoder board. These can be accessed by snipping the shrink wrap and peeling it back to expose the solder pads that control these functions: To use these functions, solder a wire from the pad ...

Here are some terms that you might find useful as you work with the BDL168. Direct home wiring is a layout wiring method where each power district and its booster is electrically isolated. The track within each power district uses a "common return" wiring method for occupancy detection and/or power management. Direct home wiring is the wiring method recommended by Digitrax for safety reasons & also because it makes detection work more prototypically. Power district is the power wiring, track, components and equipment attached to that wiring, driven by a single properly isolated booster. The track for a power district ...

The DT400 series’ Track Power Indicator and the DB150’s track status indicator show whether track power is on or off. The first time you plug in your DT400 series throttle, track power will usually be off. To run trains, you will need to turn on the track power. Look at your DB150 and/or DT400 series to determine whether the track power is on or off. 1. When track power is off: DB150 TRACK STATUS indicator is off DB150 OFF LINE indicator is on and DT400 series Track Power Indicator is off (Track Power Indicator is a small dot in the top line on ...

Q. I tried to program an SFX0416 with my PR2 and the sounds did not "Take". I clicked the big green "Program" button and after the initial buzzing for about 15 seconds, nothing further happened and now the unit makes no sounds. I am using a Compaq XP-home 1.5GHz laptop with SoundLoader version 1.16. How can I fix this? A. The most likely issue is that you are using the earlier SoundLoader version 1.16, which was not configured for full support of 16M bit flash sound memories, such as those used in the recently released SFX0416. SoundLoader was updated in ...

The following CV set up simulates prototypical ditch lights that are on steady when running and alternately flashing when the horn blows. The ditch lights will be on when the engine is running, when you simulate blowing the horn by going into function mode and pressing F2 the ditch lights will flash on alternate sides of the loco. Note, the F2 key on Digitrax throttles is set up as a non-latching function so that the function assigned to F2 will be "ON" as long as you hold the F2 key down and will go "OFF" when it is released. Follow ...

  This document outlines the power requirements for Digitrax LocoNet accessories.  To simplify wiring, Digitrax recommends providing individual power supplies for like accessories.  For example a power supply or power buss which only powers the PM42s.  A power supply or power buss used solely to power multiple DS64s.  UR9x and UP5 panels can be daisy chained provided adequate current is provided to properly power all the panels.  Through the use of individual power supplies, the chance of Ground Loops or sneak paths back to ground is minimized.  Using individual power supplies will also make troubleshooting much easier.  Many Digitrax LocoNet ...

 OpSw Setup Enter OpSw mode by pressing the OpSw button.  The OPS and ID light will flash alternating RED and GREEN. Use your throttle in SWITCH mode to set switches to thrown or closed to match your desired OpSw setting.  There are currently no published OpSws for the BXPA1. If you erroneously set an OpSw, the BXPA1 can be factory reset by setting OpSw40 = Closed Trip Speed Pot The Trip Speed Pot can be adjusted to set the speed at which auto reversing and power management is resolved.  Turning the pot clockwise will make the speed slower and turning ...

The DCS50 is set up at the factory to run right "out of the box", but the DCS50 does have several operational options that you can use to customize the perfomance of your railroad.  It should be noted that: Most customers never have any need to change these options.Changing DCS50 Option Switches1. See the DCS50 Option Switch Table that follows to decide which option switches you want to change.2. Press the PROG key. The display shows the last decoder programming mode used by the DCS50.3. Press the SWITCH key. The display shows the last switch used by the DCS50 and ...

  Setting up DS54 for Exact Turnout Reporting The creation of a feedback circuit for exact turnout reporting is simple. Connect a normally open set of contacts attached to the switch machine, a normally open set of contacts of a micro switch monitoring the throw arm, or a normally set of contacts of a relay monitoring the switch machine power to the common and switch input of the DS54 input connector. When the turnout is closed these contacts must be closed. Connect a normally open set of contacts attached to the switch machine, a normally open set of contacts of a ...

1. The DT402 handheld has two knobs called the L Throttle (Left) and the R Throttle (Right). The throttles are used for speed control, direction changes, and input of information for operation of your railroad. 2. The row of numbers (0-9) across the top of the display are the functions being used by the active locomotive throttle. 3. The larger numbers in the middle of the screen indicate the speed of the locomotives being controlled by the throttles. 4. The numbers at the bottom of the display are the locomotive addresses, and correspond to the digital decoder that is in ...

Shutting Down the System When you are finished with your sessionDispatching All Locomotive Addresses Some users prefer to “dispatch” or release all addresses active in their system before shutting down. This can prevent unexpected results when you power up the layout again. 1. Turn track power off: Press the PWR Key followed by the N - Key , the Track Power Indicator on the DT400 and the Track Status Indicator on your command station will go off. 2. Move the DB150 command station’s “MODE” switch to the “SLEEP” position. 3. Turn off the power supply to the system. Leaving the ...

  Do you have a recommend wiring procedure for the 44-pin edge connector on the PM42 and SE8C?PM42, PM4, BDL168, BDL16, BDL162 & SE8C use a 44-pin edge connector. Connecting wires securely to this connector requires soldering skills. For connections to the 44 pin connector, Digitrax recommends using 16 gauge stranded wire. For all other soldering connections, Digitrax recommends 14 gauge (AWI) stranded wire for electrical connections on your railroad. 1. Use individual short lengths of 16 gauge wire to connect to the 44 pin connector. 2. Strip and tin both ends of the wire. 3. Bend one end into ...

Digitrax's “safety selection” is an important operational safety feature. Digitrax chose not to allow one way address selection to prevent multiple operators from being able to select and send commands to the same addresses at the same time. Having multiple operators sending commands to the same address can result in serious problems in an operating session because locos can appear to be out of control. Simplex radio throttles like the DT402/R, DT400/R, DT300/R, UT4/R and similar throttles operate as one-way (simplex) infrared or radio transmitters. The DT402, DT400/R, DT300/R, UT4/R must be plugged into LocoNet to select an available locomotive address to run on ...

Many operators use a fast clock during operating sessions to simulate prototypical operations. Traditionally, the fast clock is on the wall in view of the train operators; it is set up to run at a faster than real time so that an operating session can simulate prototypical operation on a compressed time scale. LocoNet has its own networked fast clock for all Digitrax throttles connected to your system. The fast clock display is a 4 digit 12 or 24 Hour format clock. To display the fast clock simply press the CLOC c Key. The fast clock display will remain active while ...

At the factory, your DS64 was set to control solenoid type turnout machines that use a single pulse output for operation. If you are using slow motion turnout machines, like the Tortoise or Switchmaster, that need a static type output to operate, you’ll need to reconfigure the DS64’s outputs before hooking up your turnouts.To set up your DS64 to operate stall motor type turnouts:1. Connect the DS64’s ‘TRKA’ and ‘TRKB’ terminals to your track. No turnouts should be connected to the DS64 at this time.2. On the DS64 press and hold the OPS button down for about 3 seconds until ...

Q:  How do I program the PM42 Option Switches (OpSw) with a DT400 throttle? A:  The PM42 OpSw settings are used to set up the PM42, adjusting the trip current, short circuit management (including sensitivity), and/or auto-reversing. Note: The factory default setting on all PM42 OpSws is “thrown” or “t”. Follow the steps outlined below to program the OpSw settings of the PM42 using the DT400 series throttle with any Digitrax command system. 1) Connect the PM42 to a DCS50, DCS51, DB150, DCS100, or DCS200 with a standard LocoNet cable. 2) Connect the PM42 to an external power source; Digitrax ...

From the start, the Texas & Southwestern was built with DCC in mind. The T&SW was built from the ground up by an individual with considerable model railroad experience, but an issue arose that defied explanation. The T&SW was meant to be operated with a DCS50 Zephyr, and the layout support structure was enlarged slightly to fit the Zephyr into one corner of the railroad. As it turned out, the cozy corner space for the Zephyr turned out later to be a bit too cozy. The bottom of the Zephyr has ventilating slots to help cool the unit’s electronics. As ...

Three Step Speed Table CV02 V-Start (Start Voltage) CV06 V-Mid (Mid Point Voltage) CV05 V-Max (Maximum Voltage)When you are using a throttle to control a locomotive, you will notice that as you increase and decrease the speed, the loco responds to the change in throttle settings according to the relationship between motor voltage applied and the throttle setting. This is called the throttle response curve. Decoders are shipped from the factory with a linear throttle response curve. This means that as you increase the throttle setting from 0 to full speed, the loco will look like the default curve in ...

  Q:  How do I program the PM42 Op Switches with a DT300 throttle? A:  The PM42 OpSw settings are used to set up the PM42, adjusting the trip current, short circuit management (including sensitivity), and/or auto-reversing. Note: The factory default setting on all PM42 OpSws is “thrown” or “t”. Follow the steps outlined below to program the OpSw settings of the PM42 using the DT300 throttle with any Digitrax command system. 1) Connect the PM42 to a DB150, DSC050, DSC100 or DSC200 with a standard LocoNet cable. 2) Connect the PM42 to an external power source; Digitrax recommends the ...

Loco is running fine, then suddenly slows down, stops for a few moments, then starts up again to its original speed. This happens repeatedly and randomly (not at the same locations). Wheels, track are clean, doesn't seem to be a problem with other locos. Running HO using the Zephyr with Digitrax decoders. You did the right thing to make sure that the track and wheels are clean; that is one of the most common sources of problems with model trains, DCC or otherwise. What is probably happening is that the locomotive has been selected by two throttles. You are operating ...

  CV29 is assigned a single value which chooses a combination of specific effects: 1. Speed step control. 2. Speed table On or Off. 3. Analog mode conversion On or Off. 4. Normal Direction of Travel (NDOT). 5. 2 digit addressing or 4 digit addressing. Speed Step Control. There are two modes for speed step control: Standard (14 speed step mode) and Advanced (28/128 speed step control). Because of differences in the capabilities of DCC compatible command stations and decoders, you may have to set CV29 in your decoders to different values to match the mode of the command station ...

  Simple Example of a Yard Ladder with Manual Route Buttons in a hidden yard. Set DS64 OptionSwitches 11 and 15 to 'c' closed to enable route commands from local inputs. Make sure the momentary-on push buttons are wired as shown in Fig.1 above. OPSw 11 enables the local inputs to trigger the routes stored in the DS64. A1 will trigger route1, S1 will trigger route 2, and so forth. OPSw 15 prevents the local inputs from directly triggering the outputs.Option Switch Configuration Press the OPS button on the powered DS64 for about three seconds until the red led begins ...

Decoder Lock lets you use more than one decoder in a locomotive and be able to program their CVs separately.  This is a manufacturer specific CV.  The instructions provided here work for Digitrax decoders.  If you are using decoders from another manufacturer, please consult your decoder instructions for how this feature works with the decoder you have installed. For example, if you use a mobile decoder and a sound decoder together in your locomotive, you can use the same mobile decoder address during operation and when programming you can unlock only the one you want to program. Since all decoders with the ...

If you want to change the address or other settings of your locomotive decoders, you must set up a programming track. It is very important that the rest of your railroad can be isolated from the DB150 and the programming track when you are programming a locomotive. Decoders are programmed when the DB150 command station sends programming information to them through the rails. There are two basic ways of programming decoders. Service mode programming broadcasts a message to all DCC equipped locos that are on the track. Because this is a broadcast method, you will need to set up a ...

Digitrax uses CV33-CV46 to handle remapping according to published standards.The CV values that are permitted for function remapping are limited to 8 bits, a maximum value of 255. Therefore only 8 functions can be mapped to each function key.Function remapping is easy! Just follow these simple steps:1. Locate the row for the Throttle Function Key [chart below] that you want to use.2. Locate the column of the Function Lead Color (number) you want to control.3. Note the value at the intersection of the row and column.4. Program that value into the the CV listed next to the Throttle Function Key. ...

  Q:  How do you connect more than one DS64 to a single power supply like a PS14 to power them or do you need a separate power supply for each DS64? A:  One power supply can be used if it can provide adequate power for all the DS64s it is powering. The PS14 has a built-in circuit breaker; when it exceeds its capacity, it will shut down, cool off and then start up again. If you are experiencing this behavior then you need to add one or more PS14s to provide enought power for the DS64s you have connected. Our recommendation of one ...

  I have an "M" shaped 250 square foot layout with 500 feet of track and twelve locomotives. What Digitrax equipment would I need? You don't say what scale this railroad will be modeled in, which is important since the locomotives in smaller scales draw less current than larger decoders. However, for purposes of estimation: Twelve Locomotives. Each locomotive is going to draw, at the very least, 5 MA for the decoder. If it has LED lights, then it will typically draw 15 MA more; conventional light bulbs will draw 50 MA. A typical H0 locomotive will draw 600 MA ...

The DT402 & DT402's screens are an LCD (Liquid Crystal Display) that is designed to show you what you are controlling with the throttle.  It also facilitates programming and other features of the LocoNet system. 1. The handheld has two throttles called the left throttle (L) and the right throttle (R).2. There are two direction indicators. One for the L throttle and one for the R Throttle. If the direction indicator is lit, and there is smoke over the loco icon there is an address selected on that throttle.3. The direction indicator with blinking smoke indicates which throttle is currently active. The ...

Q:  What is the white wire for on the SoundBug? A:  The white wire is used on conjunction with a driver cam for steam sound synchronization. Q: What type/size loco does "generic" steam sound represent? A:  This sound was based on recordings of Union Pacific 3985, a 4-6-6-4 "Challenger" type.  Q:  Does the Sound bug come with an oval speaker to fit in the shell of the older model GPs or SDs that do not have space in the fuel tank. A:  The SoundBug comes with a 28mm round speaker but others may be substituted. The included-speaker is rated at ...

To go to the Edit Routes (Er) mode using DT400/DT402/DT500 series, you must pass through the clock editor: 1. Start in Fn mode. Press the EDIT Key to enter Edit Mode. Press the EDIT Key again to enter Ec (Edit Clock) mode. Press the EDIT Key again to enter EF (Edit Fast Rate) mode. Press the EDIT Key again to enter EA (Edit Alarm) mode. Press the EDIT Key again to enter Er (Edit Routes) mode. The DT400's display will show the following screen when you enter the Edit Routes mode. This display shows: Er (Edit Routes) in the Mode ...

DT402 & DT400 Series Throttle-Locomotive Recall The DT402 & DT400 Series Throttles store the last 4, 8,or 16 unique loco addresses used by the throttle in a recall stack; your throttle defaults to a 4 address recall stack.  Users often discover this feature when taking their throttle for use on another Digitrax railroad; they plug their throttle into the new LocoNet and discover their own locomotive addresses are still in their throttle.  The presence of stored locomotive addresses may make operations on your railroad easier.For example if you have your throttle set up for an 8 deep recall stack and the last 8 ...

Stall Current is the max current draw in amps for a motor when it is stalled. This is important in determining which decoder to install in a locomotive. Why is Stall Current important? In the conversion of analog locomotives to DCC, how much current the locomotive draws is a major factor in decoder selection. Decoders are grouped by their ability to handle the electrical load that flows through them to the locomotive motor. The Ampere (Amp) is the unit of measure for electrical current used by the locomotive. The current draw of most HO can motors is between .5 and 1.5 ...

IPLING From time to time the latest DT602 family throttle firmware will be updated and will be posted on the product support page.  These updates may slightly modify the DT602's operation, based on customer feedback/requests and priority support issues discovered. If you are happy with the operation of your DT602, and have no issues or new features you may want, it is not required to perform an available update. All DT602 family throttles should only be firmware updated or IPL'd while plugged directly into a working LocoNet. The Digitrax provided DMF file for field updating DT602's can be used for IPL of any ...

To use the pre-set braking rate to stop and start a locomotive: Move the Direction Control Lever [ 2 ] to the BRAKE position, the Brake Indicator Dot will begin blinking and the loco will slow down to a stop at the brake rate you have set up in the Zephyr DCS50. As the loco slows to a stop, the Brake Indicator Dot will change from blinking to steady on to let you know that the brake is on.Move the Direction Control Lever to the FORWARD or REVERSE position and the loco will accelerate at the programmed brake rate to ...

A cascaded route is where the last command of a route triggers the next route; this is also known to some as a nesting route. With the capacity of 8 turnouts per route, it becomes necessary to cascade routes if more than 8 turnouts are involved in a route. To highlight these possibilities, we use a very complex scenario with many turnouts and possible routes. Cascading routes allows the setup of long routes without the need for a computer. Since some routes exceed the capacity of 8 turnouts, the remaining turnouts of the long routes are setup in the second ...

I have a Athearn HO Scale MP15 Soo Line and have installed a DH166 decoder. How do I get the rotary beacon to flash? Function Outputs on the DH166 The DH166 is set up at the factory to control six function outputs. The DH163AT is configured to control the forward and reverse lights on the locomotive through the yellow lead and white lead using Function 0 (F0F-forward yellow and F0R-reverse white) for directional lighting. Functions F1(green) and F2 (violet) are part of the harness for easy hookup. F3 and F4 are also available on the decoder board. These can be ...

There are times when it is necessary to reset the Super Empire Builder. Because this is a system reset, there are special instructions: There are different levels of system reset. OpSw 36: Clears all mobile decoder information, including locomotive consists. OpSw 38: Clears the locomotive roster (such as when you receive a "slot=max" error report). OpSw 39: Full reset, clears all internal memory states. The factory default setting for all DB150 option switches is t or "thrown" The Initial Procedure 1. Determine which DB150 option switch you want to change, 36, 38 or 39. 2. Move the Mode toggle switch on ...

CTX/CTY throttles allow you to have up to 4 separate throttles controlled by 4 different operators rather than 4 throttles controlled by one operator as in the CT4 that comes with your Challenger Set. Digitrax provides these instructions so that you can build your own throttles to your own specifications. You are free to choose any knobs, buttons & cases you like, the ones on the parts list below are just suggestions. These throttles give you the option of expanding your operations cost effectively. The CTX throttle controls speed & direction for one train in the operating group & can ...

Decoders with FX function features have 4 user configurable, independent special effects generators. All current production Digitrax Decoders use FX3 functions so this article is not applicapable to these decoders. CAUTION: Decoders with FX3 function generators use different CVs to control the decoder outputs. All current production Digitrax decoders use FX3 function CVs. Before using these CVs to program your decoders make sure that they are FX and not FX3 decoders.The Real FX effects are set up by programming CV values as described below.F1/F2 NOTE: If using DH142, DN142, DN141K2, DN149K2 series decoder, when F1 is set up for FX, ...

The DT400 can control Functions 1 - 12.Note: DT400 can access F0-F12 when used with the DCS50 Zephyr or DCS100 Super Chief command station. DT400 can only access F0-F8 when used with a DB150 Super Empire Builder command station.To enter Fn (function) mode:1. Determine which throttle you want to control functions on and make it the active throttle by single clicking the throttle knob or by turning the throttle knob a couple of clicks.2. DT400’s numeric keypad is always active in function mode during normal loco operations. When the mode indicator on your DT400 shows Fn, simply press any number ...

Digitrax command stations have Option Switches that care used to customize their operation.  Command Station option switches should not be changed unless you fully understand what you are trying to accomplish.  Information on these Option Switches is included in each command station's manual.Be sure that you are changing the correct Command Station Option Switches as the unit can be crippled by closing the wrong switches.  NEVER CLOSE OPTION SWITCH #1!!Clearing your Command Station's Mobile Decoder SlotsMost command station problems are caused by filling up the command station's available slots by the following:1.  Operators failing to zero the speed of unused ...

With Digitrax Sound Definition Language, you can use .wav files to create custom sound project files. The process of converting 'raw' sounds recorded in the field into a sound project file takes time and patience to produce a finished sound project file that sounds realistic. Tips for Recording Locomotives and other Sounds Recording the sounds is a major part of creating great sound projects.  You need good recordings to work with.  Record several complete sound events (several complete whistle blows from start to finish, etc.). This will give you several recordings to choose from when editing to produce your sound ...

Q:  I am not sure where to begin. Dabbled in O & HO over the years and am now starting into S but have no knowledge in DCC. My layout is drawn, Dog Bone, with an over size of approx 20' by 11'. As of now there will be 8 turnouts and perhaps a turn table will be added or more turnouts. My intent is to run maybe 3 or 4 engines max. My only purchase so far is a Showcase Western Maryland, scale, which includes DCC with sound. My next comment is HELP! I do have a 2006 Summer ...

In addition to the locomotive address, there are different Configuration Variables (CV's) that have been defined to handle many characteristics you might want to use for your locomotives. These include operational characteristics such as acceleration, headlight functions and others. The manual for each decoder type has a complete listing of CVs that are available in specific decoders, what they do and the suggested values for each CV. Simpler decoders have few CVs while advanced decoders may have many different CVs 1. Place the decoder equipped locomotive you want to program on the programming track If you are using operations mode ...

Power Management is a concern on every layout.  With Digital Command Control, the main concern is that enough power is supplied to evey track section on the layout so that the digital signal is transmitted to the decoders in the locomotives and turnouts.Each locomotive uses power from the track, some for the motor, some for headlights and other functions and some for the command control electronics in each locomotive.  More electrical power is necessary to run more locomotives on the layout.  Digitrax boosters provide between 2.5 amps & 8.0 amps.  A small N Scale or HO Scale layout with two to ...

Before sending your Digitrax DS54 stationary decoder in for repair try these steps to see if you can “bring it back from the dead” and save a trip to the shop and possible repair charge.If you find you need to send in an item for repair, click here For Digitrax Repair Procedures and InformationAre there burn marks on the DS54 decoder?You'll need to send it in for repair!Understand CV programming with different throttleCV values shown are 00 or 000 for decimal and x00 for hex. Read your manual carefully to be sure you are using the appropriate values when programming ...

After considering the various alternatives available at the time, the NMRA's DCC Working Group found that the signaling techniques used by the Lenz System had what they were looking for and used a communications protocol that offered the greatest future growth potential. While the signaling techniques were based on the Lenz design, numerous improvements were made and a packet format that is much richer in features was ultimately adopted. While the Standard has its roots in the Lenz system, it is not based on any proprietary equipment or information.If you look at the early NMRA DCC working group FAQ's it ...

Clarifications of UR93 and DT602D/UT6D Duplex RF and network performance: The new UR93 and DT602D and UT6D throttles employ the new Digitrax designed and manufactured RF28 Modular Certified 2.4GHz transceiver module. The RF28 is configured to interoperate with existing Digitrax Duplex UR92 LocoNet access points and e.g. DT500D and UT4D throttles worldwide. All Duplex units employ IEEE 802.15.4 PHY/MAC compatible devices using 2.4GHz Direct Sequence Spread- Spectrum (DSSS) modulation. The RF28 was developed for: a)  Smaller size. The venerable RF24 could not fit in the small UT6D, and this case was designed in 2017, so a new smaller Duplex support ...

DCS50 Zephyr can control Functions F0 - F8. Most DCC mobile decoders have function outputs that you can use to control lamps, LEDs, sound, smoke generators and other on/off devices installed in your locomotives. Most locomotives made today come with a head light and sometimes with a rear light, too. With DCC, these are controlled by the decoder’s function outputs. You can also install additional DCC controlled lighting such as cab lights, Mars lights, ditch lights, rotating beacons and others on your locos. The addition of these functions can add to the fun and realism of your locomotives.You must have ...

Editor's Note: This tech note has nothing to do with Digitrax SoundFX sound decoders. This is for users who have Digitrax command stations / boosters / etc and wish to program MRC sound decoders. --------------------------- Due to low programming track power in certain dcc systems, programming sound decoders on the program track may not be possible, especially trying to assign the decoder a four, (4), digit address. This programming procedure has to be performed on the mainline, where more power is available for programming sound decoders. If your dcc system allows simple 4 digit address programming on the main, [ops mode ...

Basic tools for soldering: a soldering iron, solder, wire cutters, wire strippers, tweezers, heat sinks, etc. This photo does not show an example of desoldering braid which is useful for touch ups and removing mistakes. If you are building a model railroad, you will need to learn to solder. This skill is used for attaching track feeds to the rails to provide power to the layout, for installing decoders in locomotives, for building locomotives and signals and much more. Manufacturers minimize the need to solder where ever possible by using screw connectors, board repalcement decoders and plugs for installing decoders. ...

These instructions will get you up and running quickly. A full description of all controls and technical reference information are included later in this section of the Tech Support Depot. This section assumes that you are using a new set straight out of the box. If your set is radio equipped, we recommend that you follow this quick start guide without using radio to learn the basics. When you are successfully running your radio throttle tethered to the system, then go to the DT400 series tetherless overview article to learn how to install the radio option. Connect the DB150 to the ...

Good DCC practice means good planning for the electrical needs of the railroad. Here, we talk about the power needs of the Texas & Southwestern. Anticipating Power Consumption The core of the Texas & Southwestern's DCC control system will be the DCS50 Zephyr, which is very appropriate for a small railroad. Zephyr has 10 "slots", memory locations in the command station each holding an active decoder address. Rated at 2.5 Amps, the Zephyr should also be enough to handle the power needs of the railroad, but if more power is needed, then T&SW can easily be expanded with an additional booster ...

The DT402 & DT400 can program and readback CVs with the DCS100 or DCS200 (Super Chief) or the DCS51 or DCS50 (Zephyr). You must use the programming track for this unless you are using Ops Mode with transponding installed to allow for Ops Mode readback.  Infrared and simplex radio throttles must be plugged in to LocoNet to read back CVs & their values.  Duplex radio throttles do not have to be plugged in for reading back CVs.Systems with a DB150 command station (Super Empire Builder) are not able to read back CV Values programmed into decoders. To read back CV values: 1. Place the decoder ...

Can a UR91 be returned and upgraded to a UR92? No. Our recommendation is that when upgrading to the DT402 throttle, the layout owner purchase a new UR92, but keep the UR91 installed for those who still have the simplex radio throttles. That way anybody can run on the layout.

I entered in a locomotive address by accident. Is there a way to clear the recall stack? The only way to clear a particular address that has been stored in the recall stack is to enter additional locomotive addresses so that the address in question "rolls off" the stack.

Reducing Sensitivity for Outdoor Layouts Outdoor layouts may require reducing sensitivity to allow for more accurate occupancy reporting through the BDL168. Resistors are connected between the detection zone and the zone common from the blue connector to reduce sensitivity. A 1KOhm resistor will reduce the sensitivity by 1/2. A 100 Ohm resistor will reduce sensitivity by a factor of 10.

Update - Please Read This! The DN163K0 family decoder has been updated to a Gold-finish No Lead version of the K0 family design and has slightly modified function lead connection pads. All other aspects of this decoder are the same as the older version. This addendum details the new function connection points if you wish to use functions beyond the installed LED’s.

The LOCO Key is used for selecting loco addresses on to the throttles so that the address is controlled by the throttle. Sometimes people call this “assigning locos to throttles.” DT100, DT200, & DT300 series throttles used the SEL or SET/SEL Keys for this throttle task.

Can the PR3 be connected to the "third" LocoNet port on the side of the UP5, or must it be connected to one of the ports on the rear of the UP5? PR3 probably cannot be connected to the side LocoNet jack of the UP5. The documentation for the UP5 includes this phrase: "There is an additional jack on the side of the UP5 that can be used for either an additional throttle or for a single LocoNet device that does not use Rail Sync."

Will the UT4R operate on an Infrared System also as well as a radio frequency? Yes, the UT4R & DT400R will operate on IR systems as well as radio systems.

My signals are supplied with current limiting resistors and require 12v max to operate. What are the voltage outputs from the SE8C and does this differ depending on the supply (15V AC or 12V DC). The output voltage is 5 volts, regardless of the input power. It is powerful enough to drive LED's, but it cannot handle incandescent lamps.

We have discovered during a conversion of an earlier Minitrix V60 diesel that the 6-pin socket is not always wired correctly for conversion to DCC. Apparently, earlier Minitrix locomotives equipped with this socket were wired for use with Selectrix decoders. You should examine the connections from the locomotive to the 6-pin plug prior to installing the DZ125IN.

Note: The connections illustrated above are for purposes of illustration. The NEM socket has six conductors which are arranged in numerical order from 1 - 6: Contact 1 - Motor Connection (orange wire) Contact 2 - Motor Connection (gray wire) Contact 3 - Track Pickup (red wire) Contact 4 - Track Pickup (black wire) Contact 5 - Forward Headlight (white wire) Conatct 6 - Rearward Headlight (yellow wire)

Will the PR3 and SoundLoader software work on systems with specifications other than those listed in the PR3 manual? The beta testers have reported that the PR3 with SoundLoader software, DigiMon software, and IPL software have been found to work on many desktop and laptop computers running Windows 2000 and Windows XP with Processors as slow as 450mhz, Ram memory as little as 128mb, and USB 1.1 Ports. The beta testers cannot confirm that every computer with the above limitations will function properly with the PR3 and SoundLoader software.

Just wondering if i can get clarification regarding using the PR3 as a standalone Loconet Terminator. The "LocoNet termination" mode of the PR3 allows the unit to connect to other modules without needing a command station, when there is no requirement for DCC track packets. In this mode you can interface to a PC and add units like DS64's with control of turnouts and detection (BDL168) and signals (SE8) without needing to run DCC track control or decoders. Running off e.g. JMRI or RR+Co is a good and intended usage.

Since 255 can't be divided evenly, the some of the numbers in the range 0 - 100% have been rounded.

The SFX004 can be used in a stand alone configuration as well. In these situations just connect pins 9 and 10 to the track and address the device normally.

Can the UT4 or UT4R be set to have its own unique throttle ID like the DT300/DT300R and DT400/DT400R? There are several uses for this functionality, including it being useful when looking at logs of LocoNet traffic from PanelPro/DecoderPro when trying to diagnose problems and identify potentially faulty throttles. This from A. J.: Each UT4 has a unique ID programmed as serialization at manufacture, and is distinguishable from DT400's etc. The UT4 has values of EX1 as {x74/x75} in the LocoNet messages with EX2 equal to the unit factory serial number.

When changing the board address of the PM42 to say Decimal 20, what is the switch number to put the PM42 section A into auto-reverse? The default is 6. To set Section A of a PM42 to auto-reverse, you set OPTION SWITCH 6 TO "c" no matter what the board address is.

Is there a way to automatically decrease the sound on my sound equipped locomotives when they go into a tunnel? No, but you can use F8 to mute the sound when you enter the tunnel and F8 again to turn it back on when you exit the tunnel.Some clubs have "no chuffing" zones, where many trains are present at the same time. Operators who do not know about F8 are quickly apprised by others when they enter a busy yard.   F8 Mute (CV135) may be changed to a non-zero value, such as CV135=16 to lower the sound volume.  This ...

Will the Zephyr support a fast clock? Yes. Because Zephyr is fully equipped with LocoNet, it will work with LocoNet based fast clocks.

I have a Zephyr control station and I would like to set up a Braking District as shown in your PDF sheet in the Basic DCC issue section; you show a DCS100 connecting through a modified LocoNet cable to a DBxxx booster -- can this same setup be used with a Zephyr system? No. The braking district described here uses Super Chief and a second booster to create a braking district. Super Chief is configured by toggling OpSw47 and connecting it to a second booster that is properly configured. Because Zephyr does not have an available OpSw47, and because there ...

What does SLP mean on the DCS50? The "slp" message on the DCS50 means that the unit thinks it is temporarily in sleep mode. This may occur if the LocoNet data line is grounded for more than 1/8 of a second. You may initially try to exit Sleep Mode by cycling the "Exit" key on the DCS50, or powering down and repowering the unit. If this problem continues, you must check your LocoNet for a shorted connection.

What are the physical dimensions of the BD4 Quad Occupancy Detector? The longest dimension is 3.48 inches. The shortest dimension is 1.03 inches. Height at bridge rectifiers .842 inches and the height with the block monitor installed is 1.062 inches. Remember to allow for wire clearance at the screw terminal end (for the block detection wires) and also allow for vertical clearance for the DS1 and LED1 plug connections at the other end.

If the DB150 beeps 5 times and shuts down briefly and then comes back on again. It is probably being run too close to its pre-set current limit. To solve this problem, reduce the track current load by setting up additional power districts to provide more total power for the layout. In this case excess current consumption may clip or mutilate some outgoing packets to keep the track current within acceptable limits.

I have a Zephyr and a DB150. How can I wire the two together so that the Zephyr acts as throttle and the DB150 supplies power? At this this time I have only a single block. The easiest way to handle this situation is to divide the railroad up into two power districts. If one command station unit is more powerful than the other, then the area controlled by the weaker unit (in this case, the 2.5 Amp Zephyr) could simply be a single siding or engine terminal. The Zephyr would then become a booster, supplying power to this small ...

I would like to know what the output voltage of PROG A & PROG B terminals should be on my DCS100 Command Station. Under normal circumstances, there will be no voltage present across PROG A & PROG B. When the DCS100 is actually programming a decoder, there will be brief bursts of voltage up to 12 Volts.

CV54: Torque Compensation & Switching Speed In FX3 decoders, CV54 is used to control the decoder's torque compensation and switching speed features. Torque Compensation improves loco performance by internally adjusting for the loss of torque caused by SuperSonic™ operation. This feature is turned on at the factory. Switching speed gives you fast access to lower speeds used in switching operations. This feature effectively reduces the throttle's target speed by about 50% and reduces the effects of acceleration (CV03) and deceleration (CV04) programmed into the decoder by 1/4 when the user activates this mode by turning on F6.

All current Digitrax mobile decoders have FX3: all function outputs incorporate FX generators for prototypical lighting effects full function re-mapping so you can choose which function (F0-F12) controls each function lead

 Digitrax Series 3 Decoders include the following features and more: FX3 Function Outputs Supersonic motor drive for quiet operation Support for all DCC programming methods One-Step decoder factory CV reset Motor isolation protection White or Golden Yellow LEDs on decoders that come equipped with LEDs Operations mode read back capability for CV read back on the main line

Wired Mobile Decoder with SoundFX™+Accessory type functions for most HO scale Locomotives.

The green CONFIG Indicator shows the primary operating mode of the DCS100. This indicator should be steady green blinking off briefly once every 4 seconds. This indicates that the setting for DCS100 Option Switch 05 is set up correctly. If you see 8 blinks every 4 seconds then we recommend that you change the DCS100 Option Switch 05 to closed. The DCS100 will operate correctly in either case. The CONFIG Indicator will be mainly off when DCS100 option switch 01 is incorrectly set to closed. In this case you must change option switch 01 to thrown for correct operation.

The DCS100 uses several beeps and clicks that can be used as diagnostic tools that help you debug a number of conditions.

The DCS100 automatically shuts down when the heat sink temperature rises to around 45 to 50 degrees Celsius and the OFF LINE indicator will glow red. The DCS100 automatically resumes operation when the heat sink cools down to approximately 40 degrees Celsius. The OFF LINE indicator will also be lit when there is no track status. This is normal and you should not be alarmed.

My dealer told me that the when the PM42 changes polarity on a section of track, that it should remain that way till another "short" is detected. Mine will change polarity for about 1 - 1.5 seconds and then change back. Is this normal and my dealer told me wrong? Your dealer is correct. You may need to adjust the trip timing of that particular node of the PM42.

On Page 9 of the instructions (under 5.0 Op Sw Set Up) I am to connect my DT400 throttle to my powered PM42 . . . 1. Does “powered” mean having the PS-14 power supply to the PM42 connected and energized? Yes. We took another look at the documentation and it means that the PM42 should be operating with its own power supply. What you are doing is using the DT400 to program the internal controls of the PM42; to do so would require that the PM42 be in its operating state, thus the power supply. The DT400 is merely ...

Does the DS64 send commands over the track bus for all turnout addresses in one of its routes? Specifically, can DS64 defined routes include turnout addresses controlled by other stationary decoders connected to the track bus but not connected via LocoNet? LocoNet is the conduit for information outside of a specific DS64, including external devices controlled by a particular DS64. In some cases, the track bus may also be used but LocoNet is a more reliable path.

The Universal Panels all have a front made of sheet aluminum with a thin graphic overlay. There are four screw holes which are used to mount the panel on the layout fascia. When installing the panels, carefully tighten the screws; if they are too tight, the screw head will grab the graphic overlay and distort it.

I have had a Digitrax Big Boy for many years I recently bought a steam loco equipped with a Soundtraxx decoder I have been able to utilize function keys 0-4 but there is quite a few more that the decoder is capable that I don't know how to access example f6-9 Production of Big Boy was from 1994 to 1998. It was superseded by other starter sets and command stations. Big Boy can access Functions 1, 2, 3 and 4, but no higher. To reach the higher function numbers will require upgrading to a more current command station and throttle ...

I have a DCS100. I do not understand why my DT400's speed increases (all the way up to 99) sometimes when I plug it in. Also, sometimes the Loco number (when selected when this is taking place) will increase too. There is no control enabled when this is taking place. If I plug in a DT100 it operates normally. One of the buttons on the DT400 may be stuck, leading to this behavior. Take a look at the control panel of the DT400 and you will probably see this stuck button since it will not be in a fully returned ...

Can I convert my DCS100 to a booster. I cannot find the switches in the instructions to accomplish this. Is it too old?. Can I return it for repair to accomplish converting it to a booster? The DCS100 is already a booster combined with a command station, but it can be converted to act as an expansion booster by using option switch 2 (OpSw02).

Q:  I noticed a little black button on the circuit board of the UR91. What is it for? A:  The push button is a diagnostic tool for Digitrax technicians and it cannot be used by the user for anything.

In this example we add some more features to complete the capabilities of the DS64 / BD4 combination. In addition to the fascia button, we utilize the remaining sensors of the BD4 to automatically select the exit route if triggered by the advancing train. For this purpose, each yard track will need a short detection section just before the yard ladder. A departing train will then trigger and set its own exit route as soon as the engine enters the detection section. To enter the yard however, the routes must still be selected manually with the push buttons.

Individual signal heads are driven from connections marked DRV1 - DRV8. Although these are typically connections to individual signals, they can serve more than one signal as necessary. The ID Button is used to set the individual SE8C board ID. If using more than one such circuit board, each must be assigned a unique number so that the system recognizes it. The Option Button is used to customize the SE8C. LocoNet Jacks provide a data channel for the SE8C.

If you break or lose the battery cover for your DT500 series, DT402 series, DT400 series, DT300 series,DT100 series, or UT series you will need a replacement cover.   With these throttles being discontinued, we no longer have any battery covers availabe.  Serpac produces the throttle case we used.  You can order a case through them or other big box electronics warehouses.  

Q:  If you buy the infra ready set and down the road want to upgrade to the radio is it necessary to buy a whole new set? If not what is required to upgrade the existing set? A:  The DT400 or DT402 can be converted to DT402D duplex radio or DT402R simplex radio.  The conversion must be done by Digitrax. If you plan on using the IR features of the DT400 or DT402 , you will need one or more UR90 infrared receivers.If you convert the DT400 or DT402 to duplex radio, you will need a UR92 duplex transceiver which handles both infrared ...

I used now an Bachmann EZ Command and I will turn to Digitrax because my layout grow to fast, can I use my engine (Bachmann decoder)with an Zephyr starter set.Bachmann's site says that EZ Command is a DCC system, so you can use your decoder equipped Bachmann locomotive with any DCC system, including DCS50 Zephyr.

When using the fast clock option, the DT400 series will keep track of and display fast time based on the last synchronized system fast time when the DT400 was connected to LocoNet. If the fast time is edited by another throttle connected to LocoNet, the DT400/R will not see this change until it is plugged into LocoNet at which time its display will be updated.

The DT400/R will operate in Switch Mode while tetherless. It can operate turnouts and routes using the OPTN t & CLOC c Keys in the normal manner.

Ops mode programming is the only programming method that will work while the DT400R simplex is operating as a radio throttle. If you press the PROG Key to enter programming mode, the DT400R running as tetherless will default to the Po mode (ops mode programming). The DT400R must be connected to LocoNet to use service mode programming and access any of the other programming modes available.

Consists must be assembled and broken up while the DT400/R is plugged in to LocoNet. MU operations are locked out while the DT400/R is running simplext tetherless. Once a consist is assembled, it can be operated normally using the DT400/R in tetherless mode.

Fast clock caution: If you use power save mode, the DT400/R’s local fast clock copy will deviate from the LocoNet system clock. The fast clock will re-synchronize with your LocoNet system fast clock when it is plugged in again.

The headlights of my locomotive aren't acting properly. If you can’t control the operation of the lights in your locomotive with the DT400 (in default 128, or 28 speed step mode), be sure that the decoder is programmed in advanced 28 speed step mode. Do this by programming CV29 with a decimal value of 06.

Is track power turned on? Is your throttle in Idle or stopped and displaying a flashing track power indicator in the LCD? Press the PWR Key followed by the Y+ Key . You should see the track power indicator on the DT400 come on solid.

If the layout starts to “get away” on you, either PRESS the PWR Key followed by the N- Key or, turn the track power to “SLEEP” on the command station. Either way, the layout will stop to give you a chance to regain your composure. To resume operations where you left off, press the PWR Key followed by the Y+ Key

Do Not Change This Value. Option #6 sets the throttle type. All DT400’s are throttle type x44. You should not change this value.

The fast clock can be set up to run in 12 hour format or 24 hour format.

The backlight intensity can be set for off, low, medium or high intensity. The brightness of the backlight affects battery life, the brighter the LCD, the shorter the battery life. When your DT400 is untethered from LocoNet, the backlight automatically reduces brightness by one setting to conserve battery power.

Each DT400 can be set up with radio capability and/or infrared capability enabled, all tetherless operation disabled and power save enabled or disabled. DT400 is shipped with IR only enabled and DT400R is shipped with Radio & IR enabled

Q:  I have a DH163D decoder. How do I program it so the Mars light works? A:  Any function output on Digitrax FX decoders can be set up for any FX effect by programming its associated FX CV to the appropriate FX CV value. For example, if CV52 (the FX CV for F2), is programmed with a CV value of 034, the violet wire F2 function output will be a Mars light when F2 is turned on for this decoder address and the decoder's direction is forward.

The 10-Pin Signal Mast Bases that are part of SMBK and used as test signals with the SE8C have two connections marked Aux Hi and Aux Lo (Pins 2 & 9). These connections are not currently implemented and are reserved for future use.

Q: My front and rear lights on a steam locomotive (hard wired decoder installation) are connected in reverse. When the locomotive is going forward, the back up light comes on. When the locomotive is going in reverse, the forward light comes on. Can I reverse the lighting effects though programming the decoder or must I disassemble the locomoitve and physically swap the wiring to the lights from the decoder. A: Yes, you can do this with using function mapping in any Digitrax decoder Series 3 or later. If you have an earlier version decoder installed, you'll need to re-wire the ...

Q:  What is the procedure for programming the DS54 Address using the Programming Address Button? A:  The procedure for programming the DS54 address using the Address Programming Button is simple. This procedure only requires the determination of the turnout addresses block for the DS54. During the programming cycle the activation of any turnout address within the desired turnout address block will automatically set the DS54 to the proper module address. 

Q: I want to use the AR1 for a reverse loop between two different power districts (i.e. different booster for each connected track). Is this possible or do I need to make a special wiring set-up to do this? SThis diagram shows how to do this The usual rules apply, the AR1 track section must be longer than the longest train you will run.

Digitrax defines the TOP loco as the loco on the R Throttle Knob at the time when the MU add is performed.  This will be the locomotive address that controls the consist.

In order to simplify our wiring diagrams, instruction sheets and general model railroad wiring, the following wire colors are suggested for wiring layouts and accessories.

Setting Up a Mars Lights with the PR1To program the decoder for Mars Light or other "single" output applications, follow these steps:1. Go to the Digitrax Decoder Programmer2. Select FX Set up3. Choose the function that you want to be the Mars Light4. Select "Mars Light"5. Click "OK"6. When you are back in the main screen click "Send"

  Whether functions 0-8 are on or off for the currently active loco address is displayed on the top line of the LCD. The number for the activated functions for the active throttle (the one with blinking smoke) are displayed. Up to eight functions can be controlled by the DT300. To view the function status of either throttle, simply press the throttle knob to display the active functions for that throttle.

  Each throttle has a bar graph located just above the text area of the LCD. Each of these indicates the speed setting of the L THROTTLE and R THROTTLE graphically from a single dot (0% throttle) to 20 dots (full throttle). This is useful when the text area is showing information other than speed.

The mode indicator, located at the bottom center of the LCD, shows the DT300’s current mode of operations. The DT300 automatically defaults to the Lo (Loco) mode and returns to this mode after about 6 seconds of inactivity in Mu (Multi Unit) or Sw (Switch) modes.

The direction indicators are located in the LCD Display of the DT300 directly below the Loco Icon. There are separate indicators for the L (left) and R (right) throttles. If the arrow points to the front of the loco, the throttle is in the forward direction. If the arrow points to the back of the loco, then the throttle is in the reverse direction. If there is not a locomotive selected on a throttle the loco icon and direction arrow will not appear. Note: These direction indicators are for DCC equipped locos only. They will indicate direction based on the ...

If a throttle knob does not have a locomotive address selected when you make the throttle active by turning or pressing the L or R THROTTLE knob or L/t or c/R (direction) key, a flashing “SEL” will appear in place of the locomotive address in the LCD display. This is a prompt for you to select a locomotive address on that throttle.

The DT300 Throttle is a full-function hand held controller that includes 2 independent throttles and a common keypad to control up to 9 functions (0-8), turnouts and programming. The DT300 Throttle does not require a battery in normal walk-around operation, but if you do not install a battery, the throttle display will be off while you are unplugged from the system. The DT300 requires a 9 Volt battery for infrared operation.   The DT300R requires a 9 Volt battery for radio operation.

  The DT300 controls devices and operations in different modes:

Q:  Which decoders work on Transponding layouts?A:All DCC decoders can be used on transponding layouts. However, only those decoders with Transponding capabilities turned on will issue a report each time they enter or exit a Transponding Zone.  All current production Digitrax decoders include transponding.Transponding can be added to any decoder by installing a TL1 or TF4.

Yes. Digitrax decoders with integrated transponding are shipped with transponding enabled but this does not affect the operation of existing layouts not outfitted for transponding.

If you want to use Transponding for bi-directional layout communication and are using Digitrax LocoNet, you will not have to add any "feedback bus" since this is already incorporated into LocoNet's design! If you want to use Transponding with a non-LocoNet system, you will need to add LocoNet. Non-Digitrax control systems require a separate feedback bus for the layout to achieve more limited types of bi-directional communication anyway so, you can simply add LocoNet instead of that feed back bus.

UT4 Sleep Mode is used to extend throttle battery life; it does not charge the throttle batteries but it does reduce the draw on the throttles' batteries.To put the UT4 to sleep, press and hold any function key down and turn any address selector to the next digit. The throttle will go into sleep mode. The UT4 will release the address that was selected and the status light will briefly turn red. If the unit is plugged into LocoNet port you can unplug the throttle and the throttle will then be in sleep mode until plugged back in to LocoNet ...

Dispatching is the process of releasing a loco so that another user can take control of it. To release, or dispatch, a loco under current UT4 control:1. Unplug the UT4 from the LocoNet port.2. Press and hold the DISP (Dispatch) key.3. Plug the throttle back into a LocoNet port.

Stealing, or "sharing" is defined as acquiring control of a loco address that is being used by someone else on another throttle. To ‘Steal’ a loco:1. Unplug the UT4 from the LocoNet port.2. Dial up the address of the loco you want to steal.3. Press and hold the ‘STEAL’ key while plugging the throttle into the LocoNet jack. Note: To steal or dispatch another loco, you must unplug the UT4 and repeat the above sequence.

Changing the Direction switch on the top left hand side of the UT4 from Forward (F) to the center Brake (B) position causes the loco to stop at the locomotive’s programmed deceleration rate. Changing quickly from ‘F’ to ‘R’ (Reverse) causes the loco to stop at the programmed deceleration rate, then reverse direction and accelerate at the locomotive’s programmed acceleration rate.

If the sound does not start when you run the locomotive with a sound decoder installed try the follwoing:1. Make sure you have selected the locomotive on a throttle. The sound will not run unless the locomotive is addressed in the system.2.  Make sure the sound is not muted.  Try toggling F8 which is the Digitrax standard function for muting the sound decoder.3.  Made sure the volume in your decoder has not been turned down to a very low level.4. Check your installation to make sure the decoder is installed properly.

These are the Function buttons for sound control:

To stop everything on the layout, press the PWR Key followed by the N - Key while the track power is on. This will turn track power off and will cause all locos to stop. Press the PWR Key followed by Y + Key again and the locomotives will start running again at the same speed they were running prior to STOP mode. To exit PWR mode, press the PWR Key or the EXIT Key.

The ENTER key is used to complete the current throttle task and return to Fn mode for normal operations.

The EXIT Key is used to exit the current throttle task without making changes. Pressing this key will usually return the DT402 and DT400 series throttles to Fn mode for regular locomotive operation.

The PWR Key is used to enter power mode for turning layout power on and off. Once you press this key, you will be prompted to use the Y+ key to turn power on or the N- Key to turn power off.  The PWR Key is also used to turn on and off the flashlight feature. The flashlight LED will be on as long as you hold down the PWR Key.

The BACK key lets you go back one step.

The EDIT Key is used to enter the Edit Mode for editing the fast clock, routes, signaling, etc. It is also used to status edit decoders while in locomotive address selection mode.

The DISP Key is used both for displaying programming information and dispatching loco addresses.

The L & R Direction Reverse Keys change the direction of travel of the loco on the related throttle when the throttle is in Fn (Normal Operation) Mode. The R Direction Reverse Key changes direction of the address on the “R” or Right Throttle. The L Direction Reverse Key changes direction of the address on the “L” or Left Throttle.  You can also reverse the locomotive by double clicking the throttle knob.

The SWCH Key is used for entering switch control mode. Once this key is pressed, you will be prompted to select a switch address and issue a thrown or closed command. Switch control mode is used in normal operation for operating turnout machines and in set up mode for setting up option switches in the throttle and command station.

The MU Key is used to enter consist or multiple unit (MU) set up mode.Once the MU Key is pressed, you will be prompted by the throttle to use the Y+ Or N- Keys to add locos to or remove locos from consists (MUs)

The FUNC Key is used to enter function control mode. Function control mode is the default mode for normal locomotive operation with the DT402/DT400 Series Throttles. Press this key during any throttle task to return to normal loco operation mode with function controls active on the numeric keypad.

The tetherless indicator shows when your throttle is using either infrared or radio communications.

The DT400 display LCD includes a small star shaped dot which indicates the status of the track power. No indicator = System track power is OFF (Press PWR followed by N-)Indicator On Steady = System track power is ON (Press PWR followed by Y+)Blinking Indicator = System is in “STOP” and track power is ON (Press PWR followed by Y+ and Y+ again)

The DT400 includes an LCD information display.  This display includes information about the active functions of the selected locomotive. The functions 0-12 which on or off for the currently active loco address are displayed on the top line of the LCD. The functions for the active throttle (the one with blinking smoke) are displayed. To view the function status of either throttle, simply press the throttle knob to display the active functions for that throttle.

The Text Area of the LCD consists of the eight characters in the middle line of the display. This is where information like locomotive speed, decoder status, turnout position, fast clock, text prompts, messages and programming data are displayed.

The mode indicator, located at the bottom center of the LCD, shows the DT402/DT400 series throttles' current mode of operations. The DT400 automatically defaults to the Fn mode & returns to this mode whenever the EXIT Key is pressed. The Mode indicator usually shows what the numeric keys are associated with. For example, in Fn mode, any entry on the numeric keypad will affect functions. In Sw mode, keypad entries will change turnouts and in Lo mode, entries on the keypad will enter loco address numbers, etc.

On The DT400 and DT402 series throttles, the L & R Loco Icons are used to indicate whether an address is available for selection. A blinking loco icon means that the address is available for selection and a steady loco icon means that the loco address is currently selected or in use by another throttle.

The DT400 and DT400R are full function hand held throttles that include 2 independent throttles and a common keypad to control, up to 13 functions (0-12), turnouts and programming.

Stationary Decoder for use with a single Kato Unitrack bi-polar turnout machine or similar device   Simple hook up and set up.     Kato Unitrack compatible bi-polar drive.     DCC compatible.    

Super Chief superseded Chief II.Super Chief IncludedA DT400 throttleA DCS100 Command Station BoosterA UP5 Universal PanelInstruction Sets

Super Empire Builder superseded Empire Builder II Super Empire Builder Included A DT400 throttleA DB150 Command Station/BoosterA UP5 Universal PanelA Short LocoNet CableInstruction Manuals

Chief was Digitrax third commercially produced starter set.  It was manufactured from 1998 to 2000.  It included:A DT100 throttleA DCS100 command Station Booster

Automated Routing with DS64   Routes are a way of operating a preset combination of turnouts to predefined positions using a single Switch command. Route tables hold the Switch Address and position information that make up the Route that operates when a single command is issued. The DCS100 Super Chief can store up to 32 individual routes that consist of a "Top" address and 7 additional turnout addresses and their positions.  The DS64 has a route table that can hold up to 8 individual routes that consist of a "Top" address and 7 additional turnout addresses and their positions. Sensors ...

Use this table as a planning guide for setting up a DS64 for route control.

Determines The Type of Turnouts You Can OperateOpSw 01 defines the output type (static or pulse) for the decoder. Thrown (factory default) for pulse output mode to operate three wire (twin coil type) PecoTM or Atlas Snap SwitchesTM or two wire bi-polar type turnout machines such as Kato Unitrack, AristoCraft, or LGB.Closed for static output mode to operate slow motion (stall motor) type turnouts such as Tortoise or Switchmaster.

If the Zephyr DCS50 repeatedly shuts down briefly and then comes back on again, it is probably being run too close to its pre-set current limit of 2.5 Amps or it may be overheating due to restricted air flow to the bottom of the unit. In this case it may clip or mutilate some outgoing packets of information to keep the track current within acceptable limits.To solve this problem, reduce the track current load by running fewer locomotives or setting up additional power districts and adding more boosters to provide more power for the layout.  With more sound decoder equipped ...

If your track does not have adequate power supply to the locomotives, then the DCC signal won’t get through either. Take a quarter or screwdriver blade and go around your layout creating electrical shorts by laying the quarter/screwdriver blade across both rails every 10 feet. Your Digitrax system should shutdown when the short is present.  When the short is removed, the booster should return to normal operation. If the unit does not see a short or it does not return to normal operation after the short is removed, then you need to add more feeders.

To stop a locomotive immediately Make sure the loco address is selected on the throttle and turn the Throttle Knob [1] counterclockwise until it is in the STOP position. The loco should slow to a stop as you rotate the throttle knob. This lets you slow down your loco and stop it in a prototypical manner. If you have set up deceleration (CV4) for the loco and you move the throttle knob to STOP, your loco will slow down and come to a stop at the programmed deceleration rate.

Zephyr Rear Panel Connections1. RAIL A & B - for connecting the DCS50 to the rails on the layout.2. PROG A & B - for hooking up the programming track. Section 16.1.3. JUMP 1 & 2 - for connecting one or two smooth DC power packs to the systemfor use as additional throttles. Section 25.24. POWER IN - plug in the PS315 here.5. LOCONET PORTS A & B - for connecting the DCS50 to other LocoNetdevices for expanding your layout.6. YOUR LAYOUT -  You can connect Zephyr to most existing layouts.

When using the your PM42 with an AR1 Auto Reversing controller do not use the "fastest setting" in the Short Circuit Sensitivity Settings section:

The SE8C can be used in 2 aspect mode.  The signal control address range will be in blocks of 32 instead of 64.To use this mode set Option Switch 02 to closed (OpSw02=c).

CV08 is the factory reset CV for all FX3 decoders and also the Manufacturer ID CV for all decoders.When you read the value of CV08, Digitrax decoders report back "129".To reset all CV values to their factory default, program CV08 to a value of 008  while the locomotive is on the programming track.To reset all CV values except for 28 step speed tables to their factory values set CV08 to a value of 009.Note:  Performing a factory reset will not affect the manufacturer ID and will reset the decoder's address to the factory default of 03, a 2 digit address.

To harmonize with NMRA’s “RP 9.2.3” programming RP, the DH140 and subsequent Digitrax decoders do not implement the “legacy” {F9} decoder interrogate instruction. Note that this will not allow correct “address” read back on Marklin 6032 and older revision Lenz programmers that use this older {F9} instruction, and not physical register 1 read back. Note that even though the read back will fail with no confirmation, you will always be able to write a new value correctly.

Digitrax transponding does not use high current spikes so it does not typically cause radio frequency interference (RFI) issues with large installations as with some other bi-directional communication protocols.

This needs to be beefed up or discarded  Z Simply put, DCC will let you "run your trains, not your track." DCC gives you the freedom to bring your railroad to life! With DCC you have truly prototypical operation at your fingertips.

I think this is a duplicate  Z  Needs to be beefed up or discarded. Command Control systems, both analog and digital, allow you to simulate prototypical train operation on your model railroad. With Digital Command Control you can operate multiple locomotives independently at the same time on the same section of track without a computer and without blocking or other complex wiring schemes. Digital Command Control systems use digital data packets to communicate commands to decoders that control locomotives and turnouts on the railroad.

There have been several inquiries lately about Tsunami CV47 and the Playable Whistle function of the DT400 and DT402 throttle.  Digitrax does not use CV47 for any of its decoders and therefore this CV is not mentioned in our documentation. After doing some research we found that CV47 must be programmed to a value of 127 to enable the Playable Whistle on Soundtraxx Tsunami decoders.    

The DN126M2 decoder is a Series 6, two function decoder.  The decoder already has a Surface Mounted LED configured as the Forward Headlight.  This LED is connected to the White (F0F) function.  There are additional solder pads which will allow you to add a function for the Yellow (F0R) Rear headlight or it can be used to add another function such as a Beacon or Strobe.  The functions can be programmed to suite your particular needs.     Remember to add the appropriate current limiting resistor for the lamp or LED that you're using.    

The following picture shows the location of all extra function pads on the DN163A0, DN163A1, DN163A3 and DN163A4.  These decoders all share the same board layout.  The length is different to fit the various models.          Note: There is not a current production DN163A2.  This decoder was retired after the manufacturer made changes to the chassis and the decoder no longer fit properly.    

Notes on IPL updating the DCS240: Using the DCS240 USB to PC connection is the fastest and most reliable way to IPL/download any DCS240 firmware using DigiIPL II and the correct product update file(.dmf) from the Digitrax web site. Do not use earlier versions of DigiIPL for updating the DCS240, Only DigiIPL II should be used.  It is also possible to do an IPL/download to a DCS240 via LocoNet using an e.g. MS100, PR3 or compatible PC connection.  This method is considerably slower.

The AR1 is usually located close to the point where the gaps are cut for the reversing loop. The length of the reversing loop is determined by the maximum length of the train that will use the loop.1. Turn off track power. (Note: Failure to turn off power before connecting your AR1 may damage your AR1.)2. Connect Track Power from Rail A and Rail B mainline to the AR1. Rail A connects to terminal 5 and Rail B connects to terminal 4.3. Connect the wires from the reversing section to terminals 1 & 2 on the AR1. (Note: terminal 3 ...

If the DB200+ booster shuts down frequently: 1. Move the DB200+ so that the heat sink has a flow of cool air. 2. Place the DB200+ out of direct radiant heat like sunshine or a room heater. 3. Try direct cooling by using a small fan to blow cool air onto the heat sink. 4. Lower the track load current. 5. Reduce the input voltage from the transformer. If the DB200+ beeps 4 times and shuts down briefly and then comes back on again, it is probably being run too close to its pre-set current limit. To solve this problem, ...

I am not sure what example railroad he is talking about.    ZHere is a control panel display example for our example railroad using Railroad & Co.: This is the way that an actual railroad dispatcher would control our example railroad. Although the three sidings are not controlled by the dispatcher, they are still shown because the positions of their points have a material affect upon train operations. A train approaching an open turnout would be put at risk, so the position of these turnouts is considered to be part of the control system. These sidings would be manually controlled by ...

Each DT400 can be set up to operate new decoders selected by that DT400 as any decoder status code you choose. New decoders are defined as decoders that have not been selected in your system. Your DT400 is set to expect to operate mostly decoders that are 128 speed step capable, so when a new decoder is selected the DT400 defaults to that status code. If you operate mostly decoders that are only able to recognize 28 speed steps, you can change this setting.

There are a few tools, which you will need for trouble shooting. A good VOM ( volt, ohm, milliamp meter ), also called a multimeter, is indispensable in measuring voltage and resistance. Most any of the inexpensive meters will do. A United States 25 cent piece, or similar size coin, sometimes called a quarter. Hence, the quarter test! The printed owners manuals or Adobe Acrobat versions. Small hand tools. The LT-1 which is included with the starter sets. Patience.

  The Smoke Icon is located just above each Loco Icon and appears with the Loco Icon when an address has been selected on the throttle. When a loco is selected on a throttle, the Loco with Smoke icon will appear below the THROTTLE KNOB and beside the address of that loco. If no address is selected, there will be no Loco icon and the address area will show SEL. A Blinking Smoke icon indicates that the THROTTLE is currently active. Since both throttles must share the keypad, only one at a time can have access to the keypad and ...

Previously, we have recommended RJ12 connectors for LocoNet cables. While there have been online sources such as Digi-Key, Mouser and others, they have become harder to find locally. There now appears to be a easily available alternative. Many national big-box home improvement stores have RJ11 6P6C meaning they are 6 position 6 conductor and can be used as RJ12 although labeled as RJ11. These must not be confused with four conductor connectors since LocoNet has six conductors. You will need the connectors, the six-wire flat cable and a crimping tool. We paid $20.00 in February, 2008, for such a tool ...

This article stops in a strange place??  We need to find the rest of it and split it up into meaningful chunks.  Also needs meta stuff Troubleshooting in General:Regardless of the guides, manuals, tips, suggestions, experts or whatever, troubleshooting can occasionally degenerate into a vast chasm of darkness and confusion.  It would be impossible to cover all the areas that have, can or may cause problems. This is a general guide to identifying and resolving problems with Digitrax Complete Train Control.  Keep Good Records:Although it may seem to be a pain while setting up your Digitrax system, keeping layout records ...

The DT400 and DT400R are full function hand held throttles that include 2 independent throttles and a common keypad to control up to 13 functions (0-12), turnouts and programming.The DT400 offers wireless infrared remote operation used in conjunction with a UR90 or UR91 Receiver Unit.  The DT400 requires a 9 volt battery for infrared operation; the DT400 does not require a battery in normal walkaround operation. If you do not install a battery, the throttle display will be off while you are unplugged from the system. The DT400R offers wireless radio remote operation when used in conjunction with a UR91 ...

Q: I'm using the SDH104K1B+FN04K1 in a custom installation. The supplied speaker is a bit too large, and I'm having difficulty sourcing appropriate-size 32 Ohm speakers. I can, however, find 4 Ohm and 8 Ohm speakers that fit my needs. A: No, you should use 32 Ohm speakers with decoders that specify 32 Ohm speakers for the best performance. Check with your dealer to find 32 Ohm speakers that are available from Digitrax. If you decide to use 8 ohm or 16 ohm speakers with the SDH104K1B, you will need to adjust the speaker volume downward to reduce distortion that ...

If you want to reset the SE8C to its factory settings, follow this procedure: No track power is required for testing, but you will need a working LocoNet connection and throttle, or a PC running DCC control software that is connected to LocoNet. a. Press and hold the Option Button until the red LED starts to blink. b. Release the button, the red and green LEDs will blink alternately indicating that you are in Option Switch programming mode. c. Go into SWITCH mode on your throttle or PC. d. Select Switch 20. e. Close and then Throw the switch to ...

Remove the 8 pin dummy plug from Lifelike Proto 2000 light board.Before installing the decoder in the locomotive, unsolder the yellow wire from pin 2 and re-solder it to pin 3 (empty pin) on the decoder harness plug board.  We strongly recommend that you mark the decoder and/or harness so that you will remember that you have modified it.  If you use the decoder and/or harness modified in this manner in a different locomotive, your lights will not work correctly. Plug the decoder and harness into the light board in the locomotive.Program CVs as follows:  CV33 = 001, CV34 = ...

The subject of railroad signaling is a fascinating one.  Signals provide a margin of safety and protect the train crews, freight and passengers on the railroad .  Grade crossing signals also protect the general public from collision with moving trains.  Signal operation relies upon three basic elements: Detection of trains   Operation of the signals   Operation Logic Signaling is a complicated topic, far beyond the scope of this knowledge base.  But Digitrax offers several items which will help you with creating a realistic signal environment. Detection determines the presence or absence of trains.  Both the BDL168 and BD4 will ...

How can I connect my PR3 programming output to an existing programming track on my layout that is already set up for programming and mainline operations? Install a non shorting multi position rotary switch between a isolated section of track, 4-6” longer than your longest engine, and the various desired outputs from command stations and the PR3 output terminals. The following schematic allows a single section of track to be fed by the rail output of a command station, the programming track output of a command station, and the programming output of a PR3. To add other third party decoder ...

Adding UR92s will provide better signal coverage for complex layouts. If you are adding more than one UR92, be sure to connect all of the units before changing the Duplex Group name or channel number or you will have the units automatically re-negotiate these values with each addition. 1. Add the UR92(s) to your LocoNet. (See UR92 Installation articles, below.) 2. After adding extra UR92s, use the DT402D to turn OFF layout track power and then turn track power back ON. This forces all the UR92s to automatically negotiate a common and permanent single Duplex Group name and channel number. ...

The TRACK STATUS indicator shows that there is voltage on RAIL A & RAIL B terminals. The color indicates the type of signal:  If it is orange the track is getting DCC signals with no analog zero stretching.  If the color is green or red then a stretched zero signal is being used to operate a conventional locomotive. When zero stretching is present, the DCC decoder equipped locomotives will read their digital commands normally and perform as commanded. If the Track Status LED is not lit there is no voltage on the track, the track power to the DCS100 may ...

  The decoder address selected on the L THROTTLE is displayed on the bottom line of the LCD to the left of the Mode Indicator. The decoder address selected on the R THROTTLE is displayed to the right of the Mode Indicator. The address can show as either the 2-digit or the 4-digit decoder address. If no address is selected the display will show “SEL.” If a 2-digit address is selected (00-127), the display will show two or three digits (25 is shown in the example). If a 4-digit address is selected (0128 -9983), the display will show all four ...

Q:  What are the differences and similarities between the LT5 module that is included as part of the BDL168 package and the Block Monitor module that is included as part of the BD4 package? A:  These two devices are for all practical purposes interchangeable. Similarities – They use the same electronic schematic. Differences – They use different leds and different display configurations. The LT5 that comes with BDL168 has 5 red LEDs, four on the top row, and one on the bottom row. The Block Monitor that comes with BD4 has of 5 green LEDs in a single row.  Either module can ...

For some reason it is not possible to successfully operate Fulgurex point motors with a DS64. Tortoise work fine. We have determined that the Fulgurex motor draws too much current for the DS64. Published sources describe the Fulgurex motor as needing 400 Ma for operation, which is well beyond the capacity of the DS64. When the DS64 tries to operate Fulgurex motor, the excess current draw appears to be a short circuit and the DS64 shuts down to protect itself. The Tortoise, while also a slow motion point motor, is "on" all the time since it is a stall-type motor. ...

DT402 & DT400 series throttles have two ways of doing an emergency stop. When you use Emergency Stop, the deceleration rate programmed into the decoder will not have an effect and the stop will be immediate.Local Stop Press the EMRG STOP Key to stop the loco that is active in the throttle display. To resume operation, use the throttle knob associated with that address to increase the loco’s speed.Press the EMRG STOP Key again to stop the loco that is associated with the other throttle on the DT400 or DT402 series throttle. To resume operation, each operator must use their throttle to set ...

Selecting a locomotive-Safety Selection While unplugged, the DT402 (IR only) and DT402R (IR and Simplex Radio) operate as one-way transmitters. The DT402 and DT402R must be plugged into LocoNet to select an available locomotive address. After an address is selected, you can unplug from LocoNet and run the selected addresses with infrared or simplex radio. The throttle will automatically convert to infrared or simplex radio operation for all speed, direction, function, operations mode programming, and switch commands. The DT402D throttle has full duplex radio capabilities. Once the 402D has been configured to communicate with a UR92, the full functionality of ...

Why does the DS64 generate multiple output pulses for a single command? I get between 2 and 5 pulses over a period of about 2 seconds. Option Switch 01 determines the type of turnouts that you can operate, static or pulse. The Factory default is for "Pulse". Option Switches 02, 03, 04, and 05 set the pulse length. OpSw 02 = Closed the pulse width is 200ms (milliseconds). OpSw 03 = Closed, the pulse width is 400ms. OpSw 04 = Closed, the pulse width is 800ms. OpSw 05 = Closed, the pulse width is 1600ms. All, or any combination of ...

Digitrax DB150 Command Station/Booster Power On LED Diagnostic BlinkingSteady on = DB150 is operating as a Command Station/Booster 1/2 sec on / 1/2 sec off = DB150 is operating as a Booster only 1 sec on / 1 sec off = DB150 is in Option (OP) mode, the Option switch is in the OPTN position 2 sec on / 2 sec off = DB150 is in Sleep mode, the Option switch is in Sleep mode Fast pulsing = DB150 is in Program Mode, the Option Switch is in PROG mode. Commands sent in this mode will program decoders that are ...

Q:  I am looking for a wrist or neck strap for a UT4R/UT4D to prevent dropping unit. Can you help with a source? A:  It is really hard on the throttles when you drop them on the floor.Here's a handy tip from Zana: Take the throttle cord and loop it with a rubber band and hang it from a Digitrax show lanyard (any other lanyard will do in a pinch).   You can also install hooks on the fascia of your layout for holding throttles with looped cords.I have also seen customers glue things to the back of the throttle for ...

I have this N-scale Proto A/B unit. I went to install the decoder in the A unit to the headlight, its an LED. My question is that once it was wired up and place on the track, I hit my headlight function and the light lit up then burnt out. This is my first wired decoder I ever installed with a head light. Can you tell me how to properly wire the led headlight to the DZ123 decoder so the light doesn't burn out? In looking at the DZ123 Decoder sheet, it suggests that I check the Decoder Manual for ...

If an untethered DT300, operating as a tetherless throttle, detects no user throttle activity for about 3 minutes it will enter power save mode. The display will show: The throttle may flash the normal Lo (Loco) Mode screen about every 60 seconds. This happens when the throttle “pings” the system to let the command station know that it is still part of the system. This keeps the system from releasing that locomotive back to the system and making it available to be selected by another throttle.Any key strokes or movement of the throttle knobs will bring the DT300 out of ...

On the DT402 and DT400 series throttles, the direction indicators are located in the LCD Display directly below the Loco Icon. There are separate indicators for the L (left) and R (right) throttles. If the arrow points to the front of the loco, the throttle is in the forward direction. If the arrow points to the back of the loco, then the throttle is in the reverse direction. If there is not a locomotive selected on a throttle the loco icon will not appear.Note: These direction indicators are for DCC equipped locos only. They will indicate direction based on the ...

The DT400 has an informational liquid crystal display (LCD).The display shows: Mode Indicator   Track Power Indicator   Tetherless Indicator   Text Area   Throttle Addresses (L & R)   Throttle Direction (L & R)   Loco Icons (L & R)   Smoke Icons (L & R)   Functions 0 - 12, active throttle only   Bar Graph (L & R)   Semaphore Indicator (L & R), not currently implemented

Changing of the value of a DS54 Configuration Variable using your Zephyr Xtra (DCS51) or Zephyr(DCS50) is easy if you follow the steps listed below. 1) Disconnect the DS54 from the LocoNet, aux power source, all inputs and all outputs. 2) Short the pins of the Enable Link. 3) Connect the DS54 track terminal inputs to the Zephyr isolated programming track. 4) Connect the yellow (feedback) wire from any DS54 Output (A, B, C or D) to either rail of the Zephyr isolated programming track. 5) Zephyr Programming Steps.  6) Remove yellow (feedback) wire connecting the output connector to the Zephyr isolated programming track. ...

Wired Mobile Decoder with SoundFX™+Accessory type functions for most HO scale Locomotives. The sound project loaded into this decoder may be operated independently of any other DCC motor or function decoder. If another non-Sound FX compatible DCC decoder is connected to the track leads, then CV readback of SFX0416 Sound CV's and PR3 SoundTest modes may not be possible. Note that it is always possible to Write CV values using Operations mode or a Service Mode programming track, even if CV Read is inoperative. If the connected function loads are insufficient for CV readback with a PR3 or an incompatible ...

DCS50 Zephyr can control Functions F0 - F8. Most DCC mobile decoders have function outputs that you can use to control lamps, LEDs, sound, smoke generators and other on/off devices installed in your locomotives. Most locomotives made today come with a head light and sometimes with a rear light, too. With DCC, these are controlled by the decoder’s function outputs. You can also install additional DCC controlled lighting such as cab lights, Mars lights, ditch lights, rotating beacons and others on your locos. The addition of these functions can add to the fun and realism of your locomotives.You must have ...

When you program the DS64, you must program all four outputs, even if they are not connected to anything.  A "Virtual" top address can be used to avoid conflicts with actual turnout addresses and other routes. To create a virtual top address use a switch address for your top address that is not used to operate an actual turnout on the layout. The advantage of this is that you can consistently use either the "thrown" or “closed” command to operate all routes, making it easier to remember which position goes with which route to make them work. Since DS64 routes ...

When I get several locos in the same PM42 sub-district, the PM42 seems to shutdown at random times even though I am sure there is no short circuit, what is wrong?1.  The PM42 is set at the factory with a default current trip point of 3 amps for all 4 sub-districts. This is fine in most cases. 2.  If you plan to run more than two or three locomotives in a sub-district, you will need to increase the trip current. 3.  Use the minimum current set point that gives acceptable layout operation, i.e. minimum power interruptions when no short circuits ...

Two options are available for releasing tetherless operated locomotives. These options are set by DT400 Option #3. No tetherless release allowed: if the LOCO Key is pressed while the DT400/R is running in tetherless mode, the addresses selected will not be released unless the throttle is plugged in to LocoNet. This is the factory default. Tetherless release allowed: if the LOCO Key is pressed while the DT400/R is running in tetherless mode, the address selected on that side of the throttle will be released immediately and that throttle will become inactive. To re-select this loco address plug your DT400/R in ...

DT400 can be set up to handle stop commands globally or locally. The default is local control. With local stop, when the EMRG STOP Key is pressed once the loco on the active throttle will stop and when the EMRG STOP Key is pressed a second time, the loco on the other throttle knob will stop. To resume operation, use the throttle knobs to increase speed of the locos from 0. With global stop enabled, pressing the EMRG STOP Key will stop all locos on the layout and you will see the DT400’s track power indicator blinking on and off. ...

For normal tethered operation, DT402/DT400 throttles do not need a battery. If you want to use your DT402/DT400 as an infrared or radio throttle (R & D version), you must install a 9 volt battery.  You can use rechargeable batteries.DO NOT USE ANY OTHER TYPE OF BATTERY-AA BATTERIES DO NOT WORK. When you install the battery, the throttle will report the battery voltage and then display Idle. Once you plug in to LocoNet, the throttles will begin operating infrared and Ds and Rs will begin operating as duplex and simplex radio throttles. We recommend that you remove the battery from throttle if it is unplugged ...

Can I use the DS64 to power frogs in Atlas turnouts with solenoid ( code 83 ) type switch machines? No, the DS64 does not have internal contacts to provide power to the frogs. This could be done by using a switch machine with its own contacts; these have been made by NJ International, Tenshodo, PFM and others. Another alternative would be to use the Atlas Snap Relay. The Snap Relay is a solenoid device like the switch machine, but instead of throwing the turnout, it throws a set of electrical contacts. The relay is wired in parallel to the switch machine, ...

Can I mix solenoid & slow motion turnout motors on a single DS64?No.The DS64 is configured for either for solenoid turnouts (the default setting)  OR slow motion turnouts. Only one type of turnout motor can be used on any particular DS64.If you have both slow motion and solenoid controlled turnouts on your railroad, different DS64s must be used for each type of turnout. 

What is the difference between boosters and power management? A Booster is the device that provides the electrical power to the railroad. Most Digitrax command stations have a combined booster. The command station generates the DCC signal then sends it through a booster to the layout. A small model railroad may only have the command station and booster, while a large railroad will have numerous boosters. Multiple boosters provide more power to larger layouts.Additional boosters receive the DCC signal from the command station via LocoNet. Power management usually refers to the devices which act as circuit breakers and power distributors. ...

I have an old Diamond Scale turntable; this turntable uses a rotary switch to select which stall or track you want to align the table with. It is basically a closed connection, or relay connection to select the track you want. I was wondering if it was possible to use the DS64 to create a closed connection (relay output) to activate this connection for the turntable position. Basically I want a relay output from the DS64 to be addressed by my DT400. Using throttle control This should be fairly easy, but not in the way that you envision it. The ...

The Smoke Icon is located just above the Loco Icon. Both the L & R Throttles have a smoke icon. If a loco is selected on either throttle, the Loco icon will appear beside the address of that loco. If nothing is selected, there will be no Loco icon and the address area will show SEL. The blinking smoke icon indicates which throttle is currently active (having its function states displayed in the top line of the LCD). Since both throttles must share the keypad, only one at a time can have access to the keypad and function controls. The ...

What is the physical size of the BDL168? The board itself approximately measures 3 3/4" wide by 3 5/8" long by 1 1/4" high. For those who use metric, it is 94mm by 92mm by 30mm. In addition to the board itself, the edge connector measures 4 1/32" (112mm) by 3/8" (10mm); it has edge connector pins which make the connector 5/8" wide (18mm). The edge connector pins will need additional clearance for the connected wires. Users have found that the heavier bus wires used in most applications are difficult to connect to the edge pin connector; in ths situation, ...

The Digitrax DS51K1 Stationary Decoder is for use with single coil Kato powered turnouts only.  These turnout include the following: 20-202 N Scale #6 Left Hand Powered 20-203 N Scale #6 Right Hand Powered 20-210 N Scale Double Crossover Powered * 20-220 N Scale #4 Left Hand Powered 20-221 N Scale #4 Right Hand Powered 20-222 N Scale #2 Wye Powered 2-860 HO Scale #6 Left Hand Powered 2-861 HO Scale #6 Right Hand Powered 2-850 HO Scale #4 Lef Hand Powered 2-851 HO Scale #4 Right Hand Powered * The 20-210 Double Crossoever requires a total of 4 DS51K1 ...

Troubleshooting Your Installation To get the best performance out of your duplex radio installation, walk around the layout and check Duplex operation to ensure complete signal coverage. Depending on the layout size and geometry and surrounding materials it is often possible to move the UR92(s) to better cover dead-spots. Experimenting with UR92 location usually will quickly provide a position that is best for most layouts. Note that DT402D orientation and your body position may also affect range and reception. On very large layouts or layouts with problem areas, it is possible to add more than one UR92. Adding extra units ...

The actual track voltage supplied by the DB200 can be adjusted. To adjust the track voltage, you must open the DB200 case (this will not void your warranty). 1. Remove the DB200 input power & disconnect all DB200 leads. 2. Remove the two screws on the top and bottom of each side of the case. 3. Slide the gray front panel off the DB200. 4. Be careful to avoid disturbing components other than the ones described below. 5. Locate the small yellow trimmer potentiometer behind the LocoNet B Jack and Scale Switch. 6. Use a small screwdriver to turn the ...

I was wondering if I could use an output on the DS64 to momentarily apply power to a Kadee #309 electric uncoupler? OpSw 02, 03, 04, &05 closed would give me a 3 second pulse. The Kadee uncoupler may require as much as 3 Amps @ 22 Volts. So, what is the current carrying capacity of the outputs on the DX64 [sic] ? What is the maximum DC voltage I can apply to terminals AX1 and AX2? The DS64 can accept 12-16 volts AC or DC on the rear modular jack or 12-16 volts DC on the  AX1 (-) / ...

  Changing the value of a DS54 Configuration Variable with a DT400 is easy if you follow the steps listed below. 1) Disconnect the DS54 from the LocoNet, aux power source, all inputs and all outputs. 2) Short the pins of the Enable Link. 3) Connect the DS54 track terminal inputs to the isolated programming track.4) Connect the yellow (feedback) wire from any DS54 Output (A, B, C or D) to either rail of the isolated programming track. 5) DT400 Programming Steps:  6) Remove the yellow feedback wire connecting the output connector to the isolated programming track.7) Remove the wires ...

The changing of the value in the CV of a DS54 is relatively easy if you follow the steps listed below. The difficult part is deciding which CV and CV value to program to achieve the desired effect. The following are step-by-step instructions for changing a DS54 configuration variable using a DT300 throttle: 1) Disconnect the DS54 from LocoNet, the auxiliary power supply, all inputs and all outputs. 2) Short the pins of the Enable Link. (see related article) 3) Connect the DS54 track inputs to the command station programming track. 4) Connect the yellow feedback adapter wire from any DS54 output (A, ...

Some users prefer to “dispatch” or release all addresses active in their system before shutting down. This can prevent unexpected results when you power up the layout again. 1. Turn track power off: Press the PWR Key followed by the N - Key , the Track Power Indicator on the DT400 and the Track Status Indicator on your command station will go off. 2. Move the command station’s “MODE” switch to the “SLEEP” position. 3. Turn off the power supply to the system. The power to the command station can be left on all the time if desired. In “sleep” ...

The factory setting for the DT300 is Op#2=x23 with 128 step decoder setting and IR (infrared) tetherless operation enabled.The factory setting for the DT300R (radio) is Op#2=x03 with 128 speed step decoder operation and tetherless operation for both radio and IR enabled.Throttle Default Decoder OperationEach DT300 can be set up to operate new decoders selected by them as any decoder status code you choose. New decoders are defined as decoders that have not been selected in your system. Your DT300 is set to expect to operate mostly decoders that are 128 speed step capable, so when a new decoder is ...

Kato makes a Unitrack double-crossover, their No. 20210: Kato has advised us that this unit has four solenoids in its base, each operating one turnout point set. Connecting the DS51K1 to the red / black wire pair at the base of the track will damage the decoder since the four solenoids of the crossover will draw more than the rated current capacity of the DS51K1. If you are wiring the DS51K1 internally to this track segment, it is easiest to program each turnout pair to the same address; done this way, activating one track switch address will result in the ...

The DT400 recall feature can be configured to keep a list of the last 4, 8, or 16 addresses that were previously selected in the throttle. The number of locomotive addresses stored is determined by changing the values of Option 3 of the DT400; the default setting is 4. It is not possible to clear out the stored locomotive information held in the stack. Locomotives in the Recall Stack rotate out as newer locomotives are selected, usually on a FIFO (First In, First Out) basis, but there may be exceptions. For many users, searching the Recall Stack may complicate matters ...

Two Programming Methods Are Supported by Digitrax Command Stations:Service Mode Programming is done on an electrically isolated programming track. Using this mode, the command station broadcasts programming information to all decoders on the program track.  Within Service Mode programming are Paged, Direct and Physical Mode.Because these are a broadcast modes, we must isolate the decoder we want to program from the others on the layout by using a separate programming track that is connected to the command station for programming but not powered for operation of the locomotive. This mode works with all DCC decoders. This is the most commonly ...

Q) You are offering a Loconet Repeater Module LNRP. Is it an RailSync Booster, too? There is no description in the PDF-File about this attribute. A) The LNRP boosts (and separates) the Railsync "Standard" outputs from the master command station ("Protected" Railsync), so if there is a problem with this separated "Standard" Railsync copy, the master Command Station is unaffected along with other devices like track boosters that need good Railsync copies. This boosted Railsync is also over-current protected and the LNRP will turn off an overloaded "Standard" Railsync and automatically retry re-powering, so when the fault clears the "Standard" ...

The installation instructions indicate that a PS14 be used to power the PM42. Is it necessary that I cut the wire from the PS14 so that is can be attached it to the 44-pin connector, or is there a male adapter available for the connection? Yes, currently you will need to cut the wire, strip the ends and solder them to the edge connector of the PM42. Please see the related articles below. Which lead from the PS14 is to be soldered to terminal 3 on the 44-pin connector and which is to be soldered to terminal C? The PM42 ...

The SoundBug track connections are shown below: The SoundBug is assigned the same address as the mobile decoder, with the only shared CV's being the address (CV01), the Configuration Register (CV29), and the headlight and momentum settings. Sound projects loaded into this decoder may be operated independently of any other DCC motor or function decoder. If another non-Sound FX compatible DCC decoder is connected to the track leads then CV readback of SFX004 Sound CV's and PR3 SoundTest modes may not be possible. Note that it is always possible to Write CV values using Operations mode or a Service Mode ...

Q:  What is the preferred way of protecting a reverse loop with circuit breaker management and still having automatic reversing? A:  There are two ways of protecting a reversing section with a circuit breaker and reversing section controller. 1.  Use one PM42 (circuit breaker manager) and one AR1 (automatic reversing section controller). 2.  Use two PM42s (one as a circuit breaker manager and one as a reverse section control). The following diagram displays both methods: a) The first method (left), is where one section of a PM42 configured for circuit breaker operation feeds one or more AR1s (automatic reversing section controller), or b) The second method ...

If you are experiencing problems IPL updating legacy products with your PR4 we recommend using this mode.  Some legacy product use slower processors that cannot keep pace with the speed of the PR4.  This issue has been most prominent when IPL updating DT402 series throttles.  To enable Legacy IPL mode on the PR4 ensure you have the latest PR4 Firmware installed and set OpSw 14= c by following the steps below. Ensure that the PR4 is connected to an active Command Station and properly powered by a USB connection. Press the OPS button on the PR4 to enter OPS mode ...

Several CVs are reserved for identifying your decoders.CV07 is the manufacturer's version ID. Manufacturers can use this CV to store information about the part number or version number of the decoder. In some decoders this is a read only CV, in others it is a read/write CV. Where CV07 is read only, the information loaded by the manufacturer will be available. If CV07 was read/write, the value may have been changed and will not necessarily be what the manufacturer originally loaded into the decoder.Version IDs do not necessarily represent code changes made to decoders and they may or may not ...

These instructions detail the installation of a wired Digitrax decoder (a DN140 in this example, but many wired decoders may be used) into an Atlas GP35 manufactured by Kato prior to September, 2007.  These units are marked "Japan" on the bottom of the locomotive.  Units marked "China" use a board replacement decodr such as the DN163A2.Installation DiagramNotes:A. Be sure motor leads (Gray & Orange) do not touch frames & have protective insulation in place.B. Be sure frame is straight & mechanism is correctly reassembled & can turn freely without binding.Wired Decoder Installation InstructionsFollow these steps for decoder installation with either ...

I have read that the amperage of the power supply should match the amperage rating of the booster / command station. Yes, from the standpoint of putting more than 8 Amps of power into an 8 Amp Chief is not going to make a difference since only 8 Amps is going to come out. Less than 8 amps in is only going to result in that same amount (roughly) out; thus, a 5 Amp power supply will only yield 5 Amps out, even though the system is rated at 8 Amps. The DCS200 Super Chief is rated at 8 amps. ...

The DT402/DT400 Throttles include two multipurpose keys.The Y + and N - Keys are used: To turn track power on and off   To increase or decrease loco speed   To link and unlink locos during MU’ing   To accomplish tasks using system editors These two keys can be set up to act in two different ways:Repeating: so that if you hold a key down it will continue to increase or decrease step by step until you release the key. This option is active when your throttle is set up for ballistic tracking. Your DT402/DT402 throttles are shipped from the factory ...

Note: This page applies only to Challenger SetsOur customers continue to come up with different combinations & configurations to suit their individual needs so, feel free to customize your own CTX/CTY!Some users choose to hard wire 4 throttles for the 4 different channels so that the throttles are not able to change locomotives within the group.Parts List:Radio Shack Part NumbersSW-1: 6 Position Rotary Selector Switch, # 275-1386, CTX 1, CTY 1C1-C4: 0.047uf Disc Ceramic Capacitors 50v, # 272-134, CTX 2, CTY 2D1-D5: 1N4148/1N914 Small Signal Diodes 50v/100ma, # 276-1620, CTX 1, CTY 2SW-2/SW-6: Normally Open Push Button Switch, # 275-1566, ...

If the DB150 unit shuts down occasionally due to a track short circuit: 1. Correct the short circuit condition and the booster will resume normal operation. 2. Turning off the booster when a short occurs is not necessary since it will re-start automatically when the short is cleared. If the DB150 unit shuts down frequently: 1. Move the DB150 so that the heat sink has a flow of cool air. 2. Place the DB150 out of direct radiant heat like sunshine or a room heater. 3. Try direct cooling by using a small fan to blow air onto the heat ...

Function or “Fn” mode is the default mode for the DT402 & DT400 throttles because it is the mode that runs your trains.In Fn mode, the throttle knobs, reverse direction keys and Y+/N- keys are used to control locos.  The numeric keypad is used to access functions for the currently active loco address.  In Sw Mode, the keypad is used to operate track switches. This means that you can continue to control your trains while turning on and off functions and operating turnouts.If a throttle has a locomotive address selected, the associated loco icon and direction indicator will be lit. In ...

Many Digitrax SoundFX decoders come with two different sound schemes pre-installed.  Check the decoder instruction sheet for which sound schemes are installed in the decoder you are using.  Instruction sheets are available on this website on the product pages for each decoder.The decoders come from the factory with CV60 programmed to a value of 01 to play the default scheme.  If you want to play the other pre-installed sound scheme, simply program CV60 to a value of 00.  You can switch back and forth between the two schemes.  Changing CV60 does not erase either pre-installed schemes.If you want to download ...

I have a medium/large sized layout with a reversing district. I want to operate 6-10 trains with several operators. I am interested in turnout control, prototypical consist operations and signaling to be added later. I might want a computer added later, too. Which components do I need?You will need a Super Empire Builder Xtra or Super Chief Xtra with additional throttles for the operators and an additional DB150 booster or PM42 for the reversing district. You will also need at least one additional DB150 to provide enough power to run 6-10 trains in N or HO. You can choose and Digitrax ...

  How do I connect the BD4 to the DS54? The BD4 is a block occupancy detection device designed as an add-on device that can take advantage of the LocoNet hosting capability of the DS54 stationary decoder. It is connected in this way: The installation of a BD4 is relatively simple. Looking at the BD4, you will find a 5-point terminal block on one end and two (LED1 and DS1) 10-pin (5x2) headers on the other. There are three termination areas: a) The 5-point terminal block (left) is for the interconnection between the rail power source and the rails. b) ...

Note: Zephyr (DCS50) has been superseded by Zephyr Xtra (DCS51) which is available in an EU version that comes with the appropriate power supply.  This article only applies to the original Zephyr (DCS50)Q: I´m a foreign model railroader, and I want to buy a Zephyr without power pack. The instruction manual says that I can use a 18 Volt DC trafo in order to power the Zephyr. Can you suggest a way to connect a Zephyr DCS 50 to German current (220/50)? A:  In the North American market, Digitrax recommends the use of a dedicated PS315 power supply or equivalent for use ...

DS64 Quad Stationary Decoder      The DS64 is a Stationary Decoder for use with 4 slow motion, solenoid, or bi-polar turnout machines Simple to hook up and configure   Controls 4 individual turnout machines: EITHER4 Slow motion turnout machines, such as TortoiseTM by Circuitron or SwitchmasterTMOR4 Solenoid-type turnout machines such as three wire (twin coil type) Peco or Atlas Snap Switches or two wire bi-polar type turnout machines such as Kato Unitrack, AristoCraft, or LGB turnouts with capacitive discharge capability  Support for up to 8 routes   Screw terminals make installation easy   Use with any LocoNet Compatible System   ...

DCS50 Zephyr has ten "slots" available for train control.  When you are finished running a locomotive address, release it from your throttle so that it is available for other throttles to select and run and so that your command station will have room to run other addresses.To release an address from a throttle:1. With the loco address selected on the throttle, use the Throttle Knob to set the locomotive’s speed to STOP.2. Press the LOCO key to release the address from your throttle immediately. The address will begin to flash in the display.3. Press the EXIT key to dispatch the ...

For Tower 55 and other locomotives that require 4 digit address to be programmed using CV17 & CV18 instead of the normal Digitrax Throttle Automated method.To determine the values to program into CV17 and CV18, please complete the following worksheet before beginning the 4-digit address programming procedure.1. Write the 4-digit address to be programmed into the decoder here: _____________2. Take the 4-digit address from step 1 and divide by 256. (Result from step 2 = ____________)3. Take the digits to the left of the decimal point in the result from step 2 and add 192. (Result from step 3 = ...

Q:  Can two sections of a single PM42 be configured to perform both the task of a circuit breaker and also automatic reverse section control for a single reverse loop? The PM42 can be configured so that one section of the PM42 is used for circuit breaker operation, feeding into another section of the same PM42 which is configured for automatic reverse section control. In the field, this configuration has been found to be unreliable in some layout configurations.  If you are having problems getting this to work in your setting, we recommend using an AR1 to handle the automatic reversing secion.  The ...

There is no way to completely reset the Digitrax DCS100 or DCS200 Command Station/Booster using Option Switches such as Option Switch 39.  Option Switch 39 resets Locomotive Registry, Consists, etc. associated with DCC equipped locos by resetting mobile decoder info (that is in the command station) and consists, routes and loco roster info.  It does not necessarily reset other Option Switches as expected. A complete reset of the DCS100 and DCS200 to factiory defaults is only accomplished by removing input power and removing the battery.  This involves disconnecting the grey terminal plug then removing the metal cover by unscrewing the ...

  Q:  Can I mix UP-5s with Radio and IR panels? I want to upgrade slowly and still use the 400 throttles and the UT throttles while I mail them in to you one at a time for conversion to radio. A:  Yes, and you can continue to use the UP5's after conversion to radio; for instance, if you have visitors who bring their own Digitrax non-radio throttles. That's the real genius of LocoNet, since you can add to your railroad in any way. Note that you will need to plug in your throttle to LocoNet initially to select the locomotive before you ...

DT402 & DT400 Series Throttle - Locomotive Speed Control To control the speed of a locomotive:1. Select the loco address on either throttle2. Turn the throttle knob clockwise to increase speed and counterclockwise to decrease speed or3. Use the Y + & N- Keys to increase and decrease speed.The % of full speed will be displayed in the text line of the display on the L or R side depending on which throttle is controlling the loco. The % of full speed will also be displayed on the bar graph above the text area in the display.If a loco address is ...

Is the DT 200 compatible with newer sets? The DT200 (now discontinued) was supplied with the Digitrax Big Boy starter set. The Big Boy system consisted of a DB100 configured as a booster, LA1 or LA2 LocoNet Adapter interface, DT200 throttle, and a power supply. The primary DT200 throttle also acted as the command station. The Big Boy system had full LocoNet capabilities. Unlike the Chief, this set depended on the DT200 as part of the of the system, with the throttle acting as the command station for the unit. With other LocoNet systems, such as Super Chief, it will ...

Your DZ143ps decoder has been suggested for my Broadway Limited Blueline PRR J1a. I want to install a Seuthe smoke generator (#100 10-16v,120ma), which was recommended. I don't want to connect it directly to the track power because it will run all the time. Is there a way to connect it to DZ143PS so I can turn it on and off? Yes. The DZ143 series have a total of four function outputs, two are for the front and rear headlights and two are for additional functions. F1 controls the green wire output of the decoder, F2 controls the purple wire ...

If a Zephyr has been switched to run as a booster/throttle (no command function), can it still be used to program locomotives on the programming track? No, when using the DCS50 as a booster, the programming outputs are disabled. Programming is a function of the command station only, so when the Zephyr is toggled to booster mode, it loses the programming function. If a Zephyr has been switched to run as a booster, does the throttle still work? Yes, but you must assign an unique throttle ID to the Zephyr which is acting as a booster. Assigning Throttle Identities To ...

Digitrax auto-reversing units such as the PM42 or AR1 require a "hard" short for them to work properly, which means there must be good current flow to both sides of the gaps, on the reversing section side and on the "normal" side.  For this reason it is poor practice to put the gaps immediately behind a turnout relying on the points of the turnout to supply the current to the "normal" side of the gaps leading to the reversing section.  Resistance through those points often reduces the current to where a good short cannot occur preventing the auto-reversing unit from ...

Short Address Programming Note When programming the short address (CV01) in your DZ121, the decoder will automatically set CV19 to 0, CV29 to 0, CV 55 to 80, CV56 to 30 & CV57 to 0. This is done to insure compatibility with DCC systems that only recognize short addressing (2 digit mode). When using long addressing (4 digit addressing) these CV's are not affected.After changing the short address (CV01), you will probably want to change CV29 to 06 or another appropriate value based on your operations. You can do this on the programming track or, if you forget, you can ...

Even though an individual locomotive is part of a consist and you can’t control its speed and direction separately from the consist, you can still control its function outputs independently as follows:1. Press the LOCO Key and select the address of the locomotive that is a part of consist for which you want to control functions.2. Press the LOCO Key again to select the loco address to your throttle. The speed value will show “cn” to remind you that you can only control functions on the loco and not its speed.3. Use the steps described above to turn on or ...

Throttle Option 2Throttle Default Decoder Status 128/28/14 speed steps Each DT402/DT400 can be set up to operate new decoders selected by that throttle as any decoder status code you choose. New decoders are defined as decoders that have not been selected in your system. Your throttle's default setting is to operate decoders that are 128 speed step capable, so when a new decoder is selected the throttle automaticaly assumse that all decoders selected are that 128 speed steps. If you operate mostly decoders that are only able to recognize 28 speed steps, you can change this setting.Tetherless Operation Mode Each throttle can be set up with radio ...

The actual track voltage supplied by the DB150 can be adjusted. To do this, you must open the DB150 case (this will not void your warranty). 1. Open the DB150 case. Remove the black screws on the top and bottom of the case and slide the gray front panel off. Be careful to avoid disturbing components other than the ones described below. 2. Locate the small yellow trimmer potentiometer behind the LocoNet B Jack and Scale Switch. 3. Use a small screwdriver to turn the potentiometer clockwise to increase the scale voltage setting. Turn it counter clockwise to decrease the ...

Configurable strobes are controlled with CV49 & CV50. CV49 controls the White Lead   CV50 controls the Yellow Lead The value programmed for each CV consists of 2 digits, the first digit controls the conditions under which the light will be active.1x=Reverse, if 1 is the first digit then the light will be on when the locomotive is in reverse2x=F0 Qualified, if 2 is the first digit then the function will be active when F0 is on and off when F0 is off4x=Direction insensitive, if 4 is the first digit then the function will be On in either directionThe second ...

  To control the speed of a locomotive with your DT300:1. Activate the loco address on either throttle by either pressing the C/R key or the R THROTTLE knob to gain control of the loco on the right side of the display and the L/t key or the L THROTTLE knob to gain control of the loco on the left.2. Turn the THROTTLE knob clockwise to increase speed and counterclockwise to decrease speed or3. Use the Y/+ and N/- keys to increase and decrease speed. The percentage of full speed will be displayed in the text line of the display ...

I have a DH165AO decoder and Sound Bug and am installing the decoders into an Athearn SD70 Locomotive.The motor controller works and the sound as well. However, I am unable to get the lights to work. I connected the wire leads exactly as they where on the Athearn light board. Athearn uses twin forward and rear 1.5 volt lights yet the DH165AO will not power the bulbs. It will power one bulb at either end but not two. The single bulb setup glows very brightly but for a short time. So I tried using the 47 ohm resistor in parallel ...

Consisting is the action of linking more than one locomotive or power unit together to be controlled by a single locomotive address.  The UT4 is not capable of building or breaking up a consist.  This is handled by a throttle or computer program that is able to build and break up consists and then hand the consist off to the utility throttle operator.  Utility throttles are designed to be simple to use for operators on the railroad.  The UT4 CAN control a consist by selecting the address of the TOP loco in the consist.  It can also control the functions of locomotives within a consist.If ...

What's the difference between the PM42 and the PM4?The PM42 is an improved version of the PM4. We added 2 faster short circuit detection sensitivity settings and revamped the manual. Get the benefits of short circuit management and auto reversing without adding more boosters! PM42 Quad Power Manager lets you use a single booster and divide its output into 4 power sub-districts for automatic reversing &/or to improve operation by preempting booster shutdown when a short circuit is detected by the PM42. If you want to improve operation but don't need the added power (or expense) of adding a booster, ...

While the DT400 series throttle is being used tetherless, there are occasions when you may want to disable the throttle's controls to prevent accidental commands being sent to the railroad. For example, your train is in a siding waiting for another train to pass. You put your throttle in your pocket and go take a break. By locking the throttle controls, you will not be able to accidentally start your train if you bump your throttle knob or press the Y + Key . To lock the controls on your DT400 1. Press both the Y + and the N ...

Q:  I have a Digitrax Chief system. I wired the programming track as per the manual, using PROGA and PROGB outputs on the DCS100. I turned on the system and checked the track voltage with a Tony Trains RRamp meter, the mainline read 14.2 volts. The programing track did not read anything. I then checked the two wires coming from the DCS100 and they did not have any readable signal. A:  The programing track connected to PROG A and PROG B will NEVER have track power on except the very instant the program message is sent.  So, you would not ...

Connecting a turntable to a DCC model railroad is easy.  Each of the tracks approaching the rotating turntable bridge should be wired with the same orientation.  The power feeds through a pair of conductive rings to a pair of electrically conductive brushes that are wired to the rails of the turntable bridge.  DCC power is fed to the turntable bridge through an AR1 Autoreverser; when a locomotive enters or leaves the turntable bridge, the AR1 properly orients the DCC signal.  Some turntable designs have a "split-ring" electrical pickup, where the two electrical contacts that power the two rails on the ...

Is it possible to add a pair of PM42 Power Management Modules between the command station Rail A/Rail B outputs and run the resulting output from the PM42's on as many as 8 sets of Rail A/Rail B Wires to 8 isolated power Zones? These isolated power zones could have their Common Zone (Rail A) Wires running through RX1 transponding receivers connected to an RX4 ribbon cable running to the BDL168 for the purpose of interfacing with the SurroundTraxx Multi-Train Sound System. If this is possible, it would only require 5-6 of the DS lines on the BDL168 to be ...

Dispatching is a special feature incorporated in the LocoNet "language" to meet the needs of operators that wish to enforce a strict discipline in how operators gain access to locomotives during an operating session.Dispatching also lets you run MUs with basic throttles (such as the Utility Throttle series) that can't set up their own MU's and run four digit addresses on basic throttles that only have two digit capability (such as UT1 and UT2). It also lets you have newcomers run trains on the layout without giving them access to the entire operation.When you dispatch a locomotive address or MU ...

Scaleable speed stabilization (back EMF) compensates for load by providing more voltage to the motor.  If there is a mechanical problem with the locomotive that greatly increases this load you can prevent damage to motor by setting CV57 to limit how much throttle can be added due to BEMF.Digitrax Scalable BEMF uses CV57 to control how much compensation authority the BEMF control loop has.  The higher CV57 is (0-15 range) the more back-emf the control loop can crank in; a value of 0 effectively turns off BEMF compensation.  The value in CV57 takes into account the different throttle levels as ...

CVs are decoder memory locations that hold loco address, operational  configuration and performance settings. Adjusting them to customize the performance of a specific locomotive is one of the main advantages of DCC over DC running. - Doug StuardThese are special storage locations or "pigeonholes" in your mobile decoders. By programming various CVs, you can control each decoder's performance characteristics. CVs store information like the decoder's short address, long address, start voltage, mid-point voltage, loadable speed tables and many more. Once you have programmed these characteristics, the decoders "remember" them until you change them again. Most manufacturers use a similar set ...

Testing the installed TF4 for correct transponder operation1. Place the unit with the installed TF4 on an empty transponding track section. This test assumes that the transponding track section is already set up, tested and is working before you start TF4 testing.2. Using a DCC throttle, select the TF4 address that was programmed into the TF4 and verify that the transponder detector identifies the presence of the transponder device. Depending on how you have set up your transponding reporting to the system, your system should detect the presence of the address in that transponding section.For example, if you have an ...

At the factory, your DS64 was set to control solenoid type turnout machines that use a single pulse output for operation. If you are using solenoid type turnouts, you can install the DS64 “out of the box.”  If you have reconfigured your DS64 for stall motor type turnouts, the DS64 can be reconfigured back to solenoid type turnout motors.1. Connect the DS64’s ‘TRKA’ and ‘TRKB’ terminals to your track. No turnouts should be connected to the DS64 at this time.2. On the DS64 press and hold the OPS button down for about 3 seconds until the red OPS LED and ...

There are times, when all else has failed, that it is best to simply start over. To reset Super Chief, you can use the Chief's option switches to start fresh. *Special Instructions for DCS100 Op Switches 36, 37, 38, & 39 For Op Switch #36-#39 to work properly:   In this example, a complete reset will occur (Option Switch 39). 1. Place the DCS100's MODE toggle switch on the DCS100 in the Center OP position 2. Press the SWCH key on the DT400/DT402/DT500 3. Press 3 and then press 9 4. Set the OpSw of choice to c by pressing the ...

When DCC locos enter a brake section with braking on, they will receive braking commands from the command station instead of normal DCC operating commands. DCC locos in this braking section will come to a stop. When you throw the switch to allow normal DCC commands, the DCC locos will resume normal operation. Once the DCC loco has left the brake section under normal DCC power, simply return the switch to the break position so that the next DCC loco will stop in the section. This is useful if you want to have trains stop at stations around the layout ...

  Q:  How can I write and read the Configuration Variables of Mobile Decoder on the mainline using the DT40x Throttle? A:  Operations Mode Programming, also known as Ops Mode, lets you program a locomotive decoder's CVs while it is on the main line. With the addition of transponding in Ops Mode, you can write and read back CVs in DCC locomotives equipped with most modern decoders while they are on the mainline. Some older decoders before Extended Packet Format was used are not able to do this.For example: A typical use for Ops mode programming would be to adjust an engines ...

Fortunately, most DCC railroad wiring is very simple and easy to install. One critical point for any DCC system is power consumption, how much power an individual Booster is able to deliver. The available power is measured in terms of Amperes or Amps. The higher the Amp rating, the more power is available to run your layout.Amps have often been compared to water pressure in a pipe. When the pressure is low, turning on one faucet will draw from that water pressure. As more faucets are opened, the water flow from each faucet drops. One solution is to turn off ...

The UT4 comes InfraReady for layouts that are equipped with one or more UR90 infrared receivers. For Infrared operation:1. Install one or more UR90 infrared receivers on your layout.  These should be connected to LocoNet and powered.  If you have UR92s and/or UR91s present on the layout, these also support infrared operation.  You will need enough infrared receivers installed on the layout so that the throttles you use can "see" the receivers since the transmission is line of sight.  You may also encounter problems in rooms where there are large windows that would interfere with the transmission.2. Install a 9 ...

To get the most out of your SoundFX decoders you'll need an internet connection in order to get to the Sound Depot website (digitrax.com/sounddepot). For the casual user, access to the Sound Depot site will let you download new Project files that other users have customized. So if you want to change your loco's factory default GP38-2 sound project, and another user has previously uploaded a GP38-2 sound project file with something special, perhaps a different horn configuration, you can do it. It's easy: Just go to the Sound Depot and download the desired new sound project file or use ...

Many clubs use a DCS100/200 as a Booster in their setups.  Digitrax does not recommend using a DCS100/200 as a Booster only for this type of setup.  If you decide to do so, please keep this information in mind:   The DCS100/200 configuration is stored in memory that uses a CR2032 battery.  Over time the battery can get weak and the DCS100/200 will loose its ability to store its configuration.  When this happens, the DCS100/200 will sound 7 beeps at power up.  It will also revert back to its factory settings and once again become a Command Station.  Since LocoNet ...

               Decibel measurements on SDH164D Digitrax Sound     Sound level is a logarithmic measure of the effective sound pressure of a sound relative to a reference value. It is measured in decibels (dB) above a standard reference level. The commonly used "zero" reference sound pressure in air is 20 µPa RMS, which is usually considered the threshold of human hearing (at 1 kHz).   Examples of some Loudness rating in both Pa and dB           Hearing damage (over long-term exposure, need not be continuous)                      0.356 Pa                   85 dB Handheld electric mixer                                                                                                                                  65 dB TV (set at home level) at ...

The SE8C can drive position light type signals such as those used by the Pennsylvania Railroad and the B&O RR and the N&W RR. Leads from the signals can be soldered directly to the pads on the Signal Mast Base (the Terminal Strip Mounting Kit can also be used for interfacing your signals with the system.)You can use either common anode or common cathode signals.  We recommend that you use either all common anode or all common cathode signals on your layout for consistency in the set up procedure on your layout. If you are using the terminal strip option ...

The front panel of the DCS50 Zephyr has a throttle knob & direction control lever, indicator lamps & display, which give status indications and operate your railroad. Before you select and run a locomotive, take a few minutes to look at the DCS50's controls and display.1. The Throttle Knob is the large silver and black knob on the right side of the DCS50. The Throttle Knob controls locomotive speed from STOP to FULL speed. Turn it clockwise to increase speed and counter clockwise to decrease speed.2. The Direction Control Lever is the small silver lever (located on the left side of ...

Q: I am building a new DCC layout that will include a logging spur that is simply a single long piece of track with no loop. I want to have a train go back and forth on this track which automatically reverses when it gets to each end. While the AR1 was designed for reversing loops, can it be wired to simply reverse a train on a straight piece of track? A:  Not in the way that you intend. One of the interesting problems with DCC is that we often still think in terms of DC, where the track polarity ...

How to disable command station capability in a DCS51 (Zephyr Xtra) or DCS50 (Zephyr) so it will operate as a booster and throttle without command station capabilityIf you have outgrown your Zephyr Xtra or Zephyr and have moved up to a more powerful command station, you can disable the command station capability in your DCS51 or DCS50 and continue using it as a booster and throttle in your system.Digitrax operators who upgrade from Zephyr to more powerful command stations for their systems can change Zephyr into a Booster/Throttle by setting OpSw 02 to closed. Changing DCS51/DCS50 Option Switch 02 to closed to disable command station capability: ...

The Trix GG-1 is a fine die cast locomotive model which is equipped with a sound decoder. As produced by the Trix factory in Germany, the sound functions are: F0 Normal headlights F1 Bright headlights F2 Cab lights F3 Sound of main relay F4 Low speed switching range (switching acceleration / braking delay off) F5 Bell F6 Horn, continuous blast F7 Sound of pantograph being raised and making contact with the wire F8 Sound of blower motor F9 Sound of switching relays F10 Sound of cab radio F11 Sound of couplers F12 Sound of clickety clack railroad track Digitrax operators ...

Some Digitrax decoders offer scalable speed stabilization (also called back EMF) control to help smooth out operation in the low end of the speed range.  This feature can be beneficial especially in N scale switching situations especially when the decoder can select how much of this effect to implement (scalable speed stabilization).  Speed stabilization is a decoder feature that can be used with any DCC system.  Most Digitrax decoders that support this feature are shipped with scalable speed stabilization turned off so, to use it you will need to set program them to use this feature.  Other Digitrax decoders are ...

The DS64 is a powerful stationary decoder that can be used to control different devices on your railroad. It can be used on both command control and analog model railroads. The DS64 is configured by the settings of different Option Switches (OpSw's), listed below: OpSw01 - Solenoid or slow motion devices OpSw02 - Pulse Timeout, 200ms OpSw03 - Pulse Timeout, 400ms OpSw04 - Pulse Timeout, 800ms OpSw05 - Pulse Timeout, 1600ms OpSw06 - Output Auto Power Up OpSw07 - Factory-default Reset OpSw08 - Regular/Extended Startup Delay OPSw09 - Timeout Option OpSw10 - Throttle/Computer Option OpSw12 - Sensor Input Option OpSw13 ...

   Setting the Duplex Group Channel:  1. Connect the DT402D to the front RJ12 jack of any UR92 on the LocoNet.2. On the DT402D press the opTN key and then the EDIT key.  The Group Channel Numer (11-26) will now show in the lower left hand side of the display. 3. Use the Y/+ key to change to a higher channel in the available range of 11 through 26.  The N/- key will change to a lower channel.  4. Press the ENTER key to update the current displayed characters as the new UR92 Duplex Group Channel. To skip making any changes, ...

To change DT400 Option Settings 1. Consult the Throttle Option Setting Tables found in the DT400 manual to determine which settings you want to make for each of the 6 available options. 2. Press the OPTN t Key and the display will show: 3. The right side of the display will show the current value for OP#1. The default setting for OP#1 is x01. Notice that these values are entered in hex format. The “x” in front of the value lets you know to expect to use hex numbers. Pressing the throttle keys will not change to decimal values in this ...

I am building a layout that will have two completely separated track plans; not connected with each other by any track. I am running one layout with a Super Chief that has one AR1 reversing controller.  I would like to run the second layout with the same throttle. It will have a reversing loop, as well as a turntable.  I have thought that I could run the second layout with a booster and a couple of AR1s or PM42.My questions is, will I have any problems with the reversing loops, especially if one on each layout is triggered at nearly ...

DT402 & DT400 Series Throttles Locomotive Directrion Control There are two ways to change the direction of the locomotive address from the DT402 and DT400 Series Throttles:Double click the Throttle Knob to reverse the direction of a locomotive running on that throttle:1. Double click the Throttle knob that is controlling the locomotive. Press down on the knob quickly two times (2 distinct key presses within 1/2 second).2. The locomotive selected on that throttle will change direction.3. Repeat the process to reverse again, etc.4. Double clicking the R Throttle knob will reverse only the locomotive running on that throttle. Double click ...

  The DT300 can be used to access your systems Option Switches (OpSw):1. Release all locos selected on the throttle before you begin.2. Unplug the DT300 from LocoNet.3. Press and hold the SEL key while plugging the DT300 back into LocoNet.n.b.You can also enter option setting by holding down the SEL key while installing a battery in your DT300 while it is not connected to LocoNet.Your throttle will display a screen similar to this: 4. The DT300 display will show Op#1=x## where the x## represents the hexadecimal number of the current setting for Op#1. The default setting for Op#1 is ...

My PM42s seem to correctly trip on track shorts and auto-reverse reliably, but the power briefly drops out during these events, and when the PM42s attempt a fault recovery into a persistent short circuit, why is this?No power on earth can stop the track voltage of the booster from collapsing to a low value when a true short circuit is present. This is simply Ohm’s law in action!Actual track voltage seen depends on: the loop resistance of the short circuit, the current capacity of the booster and power supply and whether the Booster employs "smart" fault detection and recovery along ...

You'll need a few simple tools when you begin installing decoders: A soldering iron, preferably temperature controlled. Though many installations do not require soldering, you may still need to use a soldering iron to install extras like lamps for special lighting effects. Solder. A small screwdriver for disassembling your loco. Small diagonal cutters for cutting & stripping small wire. Tweezers to pick up small loco parts. Heat shrink tubing for protecting wire connections, this is better than electrical tape. 1. Read the instructions FIRST and PLAN your installation. Have the proper tools on hand. 2. Choose a locomotive that runs ...

Q: I am setting up a yard control panel with a CML Electronics DTM30. For the DTM30 to know what state a turnout is in, it can issue an interrogate command but my DS54's do not seem to respond with this information. Is there a trick to this? A:  According to CML: The DTM30 makes use of the “Interrogate” feature that all modern Digitrax systems use. After power up, the Command station normally sends out 8 switch commands. All accessory devices respond to these, and send LocoNet messages back reporting sensor states and point states. The DTM30 can also send ...

The factory setting for Op#1 for all DT300 throttles is Op#1=x01. This option controls Tracking, Fast Clock Display, Key/Knob Clicks and Stop, local/global.Ballistic or Straight Line TrackingWith ballistic tracking, the faster you rotate the throttle knob, the faster the data changes in the throttle. When ballistic tracking is enabled so are typematic keys. With typematic keys, when you press and hold the Y/+ or N/- keys, the values will continue to increase or decrease without having to do a separate key press for each increment. Your DT300 was shipped with ballistic tracking as the factory default setting.With straight line tracking ...

When using more than one DS64 in a DCC environment, you must assign a Board ID to each additional DS64 so that each one has a unique Board ID.You will need to set the DS64's board ID if you are planning to use the DS64's 8 inputs with a computer, system throttle, or other smart device on your layout that needs to know when a turnout has been manually thrown or closed via a particular DS64.You can use the 8 inputs on the DS64 to control the operation of the 4 outputs that control your turnouts.  For example, you can ...

Your Super Empire Builder Starter Set contains: The DB150, which is the system’s DCC command station. It generates the DCC signals that control decoders and other devices on your layout. The DB150 is also a DCC booster. Boosters receive DCC signals from the command station, amplify them and put them on the track along with the power from the transformer to run the locomotives. You can have several boosters on your layout to provide additional power to run more locos. Depending upon the set, there is either a DT402 or DT402D (duplex radio throttle), which is the DCC throttle that ...

  There are three different ways to power the DS64.  Track power (Trk A and Trk B), Auxiliary power (AX1(-) and AX2(+)) and power through the rear modular power connector.  Connect the Trk A and Trk B screw terminals of the Power and Track Connections to the corresponding Rail A and Rail B track connections.  The PS14 power supply can be used with Auxiliary or the rear modular power connector.  The DS64 requires 300mA for proper operation.  Only one DS64 can be powered per PS14.  A generic DC power supply between 12-16vdc and 300mA can be connected to a DS64 ...

The DN142 comes from the factory with BACK EMF SPEED STABILIZATION (BEMF) turned off. Follow this procedure to turn it on and to adjust it. Later generations of Digitrax mobile decoders do not require this procedure. Activation: To activate the BEMF feature, change CV57 to a value of 06. This will give good performance with most brands of locomotives. If the locomotive surges while using BEMF use a lower value for CV56. It may also be necessary to adjust CV's 55, 56, & 57 to get the motor performance desired for your particular locomotive. Adjustment: 1. Program CV57 (Droop control) ...

Resetting Factory Defaults You are unlikely to encounter a problem that will require a factory reset. One such instance may occur if you set a password for your Duplex Group name and forget what it is. Resetting to factory default condition is an easy way to correct the situation. Note: If you have more than one UR92 in your layout, you will want to disconnect all of them to do a full factory reset on each unit as follows. Once they have been reset, reconnected to your LocoNet, and allowed to renegotiate a common Group name; you can change the ...

Bring Your Locomotive to a Compete Stop Turn the Throttle Knob that the loco address is selected on counterclockwise until the speed display shows 00 and the loco stops moving. This lets you slow down your loco and stop it in a prototypical manner.If you have set up deceleration for the loco and you move the throttle knob to 0% speed, your loco will slow down and come to a stop at the programmed deceleration CV value.   We strongly recommend that you run your locos with the factory default of no deceleration until you are familiar with your system. If ...

Railroad & Co. is a suite of computer programs for both digitally and conventionally controlled model railroads. The BDL168 needs to have several Option Switches changed for proper operation with Railroad & Co.'s Train Controller program. Our recommendations are based upon experience with earlier versions of the program: Suggested BDL168 Settings for Railroad & Co. (from European users): OpSw9 = Closed (No message sent if un-powered) OpSw36 = Closed (Ignore GPON) OpSw37 = Closed (Long delays for sensors) OpSw38 = Closed (Extra long delay for sensors) OpSw39 = Closed (Verbose mode enabled) OpSw43 = Closed (Filter for transponding disabled) OpSw45 ...

I've recently purchased a DCS50 system to run my HO trains. Since I'm new to the hobby I'm throughly confused on what parts I need to wire my 4 x 8 foot track to my control box. How many feeder lines do I need and what size do you recommend, and how do I hook these up to my control box? What size does bus wire do I need and how do I connect all this to my system? So far, all the articles just make recommendations general terms without specifics. I have purchased 2 terminal clips but have yet ...

Stealing an Address that is in use by another throttle If you try to select a loco address that is already selected on another throttle the DT300 will display “Steal?=Y” in the text area. This is a safety interlock to prevent operators from taking control of locos that are already selected on other throttles. Occasionally it is necessary to override this interlock to gain control of a loco that is “lost” for whatever reason. This override is called stealing and can result in having a single loco address selected on two different throttles at the same time.To Steal An Address With ...

While it is running as a tetherless throttle, the DT402 and DT400 R and D versions automatically check the power available to the throttle each time a battery is inserted and each time it is plugged into or unplugged from LocoNet. The battery's voltage will be displayed in the text area of the throttle briefly each time the throttle is plugged in or is unplugged from LocoNet. When you plug in to LocoNet the number displayed will be the power provided by LocoNet. This value will be between 9 & 15 volts. Other characters will also be displayed in the LCD depending on ...

How To Run a Route with DS64:1. Select the Switch Address that corresponds to the Top Address of the route you want to run.2. Issue a Closed or Thrown command depending on which you set up in the route table.Note that if you are using an actual switch address as your top address and you send the opposite closed or thrown command from that set up in the route; you will operate that switch address only and not the route.For example: If you set up Switch Address 50 as your Top Address by sending a Thrown command, you’ll need to ...

Photo Courtesy Kato, USA The DN143K2 replaced the earlier DN122K2 as a custom decoder designed for the Kato RDC in N-Scale. This is not a particularly easy installation and there have been some reports of problems with the headlights. Paul Lator has some experience with this installation, and this may be of help to you: "The wiring with the DN143K2 works well if you do not route the wires over the top of the seating in the RDC, rather completely disassemble the unit, mount the decoder in it's designated location then run the wires through the drive shaft tunnels. Place ...

If you have more than four turnouts, you will need to program the addresses.The DS64 has 4 Output pairs labeled 1R & 1G, 2R & 2G, 3R & 3G, and 4R & 4G.  The DS64 is shipped from the factory with these outputs programmed as Switch Addresses 01, 02, 03, and 04 respectively. You can set the Switch Address of each of these four Outputs to any value from 01 - 2048.NOTE:  During this procedure the DS64 must be connected to an active LocoNet with an active command station.1. On the DS64’s control panel, press and hold the ID button ...

Q: Can you have two command stations on the same layout? A: No. If you try and run with two command stations you will experience what we usually refer to as "shocking, horrifying results." Two command stations on a single layout is often a problem with modular layouts. You can disable the command station capability in Digitrax Command Station/Boosters so that you can use them as boosters only to add more power to your layout.For the DCS100 to disable command station mode:1. Set Op switch 2 to "c" 2. Set Op switch 5 to "t" 3. Set it to auto ...

  Note: DT300 radio or infrared versions must be plugged in to LocoNet to edit the fast clock settings.1. From Lo (Loco) mode, press the MODE key to change to Sw (Switch) mode.2. Press the FN/F0 key to change from Sw (Switch) mode to E (Editor) mode.3. The mode indicator in the center of the bottom row of the display will show Ec (Edit Clock Mode) and the text area will show the current system time in either a 12 or 24 hour format.4. Use the L and R THROTTLE knobs to dial up the desired start time. Use the ...

The PS615 is the Digitrax recommended power supply for the DCS240 in 5 amp mode.  For operations at 8 amps the PS2012 is the recommended power supply. When using the PS2012 special wiring considerations need to be used when powering both the DCS240 and legacy boosters from the same PS2012.  Leagacy boosters are defined as the DCS100, DCS200, DB150, DB200 or DB100.  Please see the separate article “Powering your DCS240 with a PS2012” and the additional notes below. The DCS240 may be powered either using the barrel plug connector or the screw terminals labeled “+” and “- “. The barrel ...

You can automate grade crossing signal lights with block occupancy sensors. Install a BD4 to detect track occupancy as shown in the figure below. Other than removing the Op Sw35 commands from the routes used in the related article example, there is no additional programming needed for the DS64. Sensor operated occupancy detection requires that all rolling stock be equipped with resistor wheels for proper detection or that the detection section is longer on each side of the RR Crossing than the full length of a train since only the locomotive will draw current. A lighted caboose on the end of ...

The DCS240 offers 400 locomotive slots and can support up to 400 throttles.  These slots can be broken down in to standard slots and expanded slots.  There are 120 standard slots in the DCS240, these slots are accessible using any Digitrax throttle.  There are an additional 280 expanded slots available to DT402 R2 (tethered and Duplex) and later throttles.  The DCS240 identifies the throttle type being used and assigns and adjusts the slots accordingly.  Expanded capability throttles are given the Expanded slots first, leaving the standard slots available for legacy throttles.  All this is done in the background and will ...

Zephyr and systems using the DT400 will automatically program 4-digit address' with no math required. Those using other systems must manually program a 4-digit address. If you want to program a 4 digit address you simply cannot take the desired locomotive address and split the number and stick it into CV17 & CV18. The following example will NOT work: Locomotive 2345 CV17 = 23, CV18 = 45 – This isn’t how 4 digit addressing works. This method WILL work: Here is a simple method for figuring out what values belong in CV17 & CV18: The desired locomotive 4 digit address ...

With this section, we will talk about the practical realities of building a model railroad with DCC. We chose Dallas, Texas as our locale, in part because so many great model railroaders came from Dallas, names that may not be familiar to you but people who helped make the hobby into what it is today. Texas is big; any Texan will tell you so. But even when allowing for Texan pride, the ordinary outsider develops an appreciation for Texas size. From the piney woods of Lufkin in the east to the rough mountains of Big Bend, from the high plains ...

  Digitrax UT4 Throttle Operating Instructions by Dan Bourque     Selecting a locomotive or consist 1.         Dial the 4-digit locomotive address into the “LOCO ADDRESS” dials             - For a consist, the address will normally be the lead locomotive             - For a 3-digit locomotive number, use “0” for the first digit 2.         Plug the throttle into any receptacle on the layout fascia (e.g. Digitrax UP5) 3.         Press the “SEL” key, the ST light on the throttle should turn green 4.         Move the direction selector on the throttle to either “R” or “F” 5.         Move the ...

CV133 and CV134 work together to control chuff timing. CV133 and CV134 can be adjusted to create the desired chuff rate in your locomotive, or you can configure your sound decoder with CV133 and CV134 to use an external cam to create chuffing sounds. CV133 Steam Chuff/CAM configurations: CV 133 set to a value between 1-127 determines the driver size in inches. (Default Value = 63) CV134 Steam gear ratio trim CV 134 set to a value of 32=100% ratio. Setting CV133's value from 1-127, puts the sound decoder into 'Autochuff' mode. Autochuff mode tells the decoder to simulate driver ...

If you are NOT plugged into a LocoNet port1. Use the 4 rotary address selector knobs on your UT4 to dial up the 2 or 4 digit address of the locomotive you want to run.  To enter a 2-digit addresses, set the first two selector knobs to 0 and enter the two digit address on the 2 address selector knobs on the right hand side of the throttle (for example 0025).2. Plug the UT4 into any LocoNet port and automatic selection occurs.3. A Green Status light confirms that selection has been done successfully - You’re off and running!4. A Red Status light means the loco is ...

Digitgrax refers to the throttle knob on the left side as the L Throttle and the throttle knob on the right side as the R Throttle. This corresponds to the L & R that appears on the throttle. The throttle knobs on the DT400 use “encoders.” They give very smooth, fine speed control. In 128 speed step mode it takes four complete rotations of the knob to go from stop to full speed. When you select a locomotive that is already moving on either throttle knob, that throttle will continue to run the locomotive at the same speed and in the ...

How To Set Up Routes Using Your DS64NOTE:  During this procedure the DS64 must be connected to an active LocoNet with an active command station.1. Press and hold down the STAT button on your DS64 until the green LED begins to blink quickly. You are now ready to set up a Route.2. To program the DS64 Route Number, use your DCC throttle in Switch mode to select a Switch Address from 1 through 8 and issue a Closed or Thrown command. This lets the DS64 know which of the 8 available routes you are setting up. This is NOT the ...

My son & I have PROTO 1000 Diesel EMD F3A-B Sets. The powered locos are equipped with an eight-pin plug for easy decoder installation. Our problem is that we've been looking through books & have no idea what sound card & speakers we are going to need that corresponds with these type of locomotives. I was told that they would need sound cards that are from the "Early Diesel" era. If this is true, please tell me what sound cards,speakers & wires do we need to make this happen? We are fond of F-units, and the Proto 1000 F-units are ...

Kato recommends, and Digitrax concurs, that the best DCC performance with the Unitrack turnout requires that you set each turnout to "Non-power-routing". Kato has offered a variety of turnouts in their H0 Unitrack line.381-2840 - LH, 490mm Radius, selectable operating mode with power or non-power routing.381-2841 - RH  490mm Radius, selectable operating mode with power or non-power routing.381-2850 - LH, #4, power routing only. * Some additional power feeds required for use with DCC 381-2851 - RH, #4, power routing only. * Some additional power feeds required for use with DCC381-2860 - LH, #6, live or insulated frogs, power or non-power ...

I have a Broadway Limited Import diesel locomotive equipped with factory DCC and Sound. Every time I turn on my Digitrax Zephyr DCS50 the engine starts to short out. It begins to slow down and then jerks a little and sometimes it stops completely. My Zephyr shows a line of flickering zeros across the dial and the engine decoder number even flickers on and off at times. I have checked all terminal connections and for foreign matter on the track but have not had any success in solving the problem.I have taken all cars off the track to make sure ...

How do I set up the SE8C to control semaphores? Installing Semaphore Type Signals with SE8CThe SE8C can be set up to use its 8 turnout motor drive outputs to run 8 three-position semaphore (arm type) signals using slow motion turnout control machines (such as the TortoiseTM machines) as actuators. These 8 semaphore signals are available in addition to the standard 32 LED signal heads on the 8 signal control cables and occupy a separate semaphore address control range.The SE8C automatically sequences the three possible mechanical arm positions to match 3 aspects of red, green and yellow using a position ...

I'm helping a friend rewire an existing layout from analog to digital. You might be familiar with the layout, it is the original Clinchfield layout that Model Railroader built back in the late seventies, believe it or not. The layout, of course, is blocked for analog through DPDT switches which have been eliminated. I was able to repair the wiring back to original using the drawings that MR printed. The layout uses common rail wiring, this is what I have to work with, and to rewire using home run wiring would be a MAJOR rework, not doable. I was able ...

  Digitrax UT4D Throttle Operating Instructions by Dan Bourque   v1.0 Selecting a locomotive or consist 1.         Dial the 4-digit locomotive address into the “LOCO ADDRESS” dials             - For a consist, the address will normally be the lead locomotive             - For a 3-digit locomotive number, use “0” for the first digit 2.         Press the “SEL” key, the ST light on the throttle should flash green 3.         Move the direction selector on the throttle to either “R” or “F” 4.         Move the speed knob until train moves 5.         For headlight, press the “F0” key (“F3” will ...

Ops Mode programming, also known as "Programming on the Main" lets you change the configuration of an individual decoder while the locomotive is on your railroad without having to move it to the programming track.Operations mode programming lets you program CVs in DCC locomotives equipped with Ops mode capable decoders while they are on the mainline. A typical use for Ops mode programming would be to change the acceleration rate (CV03) or the deceleration rate (CV04) of your locomotives to simulate the weight and braking capability of the train to compensate for changing the number of cars or power units on a ...

I don't understand what the white cam lead gets hooked up to. Some model steam locomotives are equipped with, or can be equipped with, a cam arrangement which coordinates the sound to the rotation of the drivers creating chuffing. As the wheels turn, a switch opens and closes, operating the chuff sound produced by the sound decoder. The white wire goes from the decoder to a microswitch which is operated by a cam that is mounted on the axle of one of the drivers. In operation, when the white wire senses the DCC track signal, it operates the chuff sound ...

Some DCC systems need to have CV's 17 and 18 programmed separately to assign the decoder a 4 digit address.Digitrax command stations handle this automatically by default.  If you have a decoder that needs manual entry of CV17 & CV18, follow these steps:You cannot simply split the four digit address in 2 halves and input these into CVs 17 and 18. A conversion from decimal numbers to hexadecimal numbers is required. Once the hexadecimal conversion for the 4 digit address is performed, this number is then split in half and then each half is input into CV17 and CV18 respectively.To ...

Follow these simple instructions to determine the best location/s on your layout for installing your UR panels for the best possible infrared or radio reception. With LocoNet, you can use Infrared, Duplex Radio and Simplex radio individually or in any combination on your layout.You'll need to be able to observe whether your command station is receiving commands from the UR panels when you are installing infrared or radio receivers and transceivers.  Your Digitrax command station makes it easy to determine when the system is receiving a signal and when it is not.  You can observe the NET LED and the Track Status Indicator or your ...

  What is Sw (Switch) Mode? Switch mode is used by throttles for sending commands to accessory decoders and for changing option switches in your LocoNet system. The most common use of switch mode is for operating turnouts.Switches are either thrown or closed.To change the position of a switch or turnout: 1. Press the SWCH key to enter switch mode. When you enter Switch mode, the throttle knobs & direction keys continue to control the loco addresses running on the throttle. Loco speed is displayed on the bar graph and loco direction is displayed on the direction indicators for each ...

  Digitrax DCS50 (Zephyr) Operating Instructions by Dan Bourque   v1.0 Selecting a locomotive or consist 1.         Press the “LOCO” key (display will flash) 2.         Enter the address of the locomotive or consist - For a consist, the address will normally be the lead locomotive             - For a 3-digit locomotive number, use “0” for the first digit 3.         Press the “LOCO” key again (display will stop blinking) 4.         Move the direction selector on the throttle to either “Forward” or “Reverse” 5.         Move the speed knob until train moves   Dispatching (releasing) a locomotive or consist 1.         ...

Stealing is  also known as Forcing An Address Selection or SharingIf you try to select a loco address that is already selected on another throttle the DT400 will display “Steal?=Y” in the text area. This is a safety interlock to prevent operators from taking control of locos that are already selected on other throttles. Occasionally it is necessary to override this interlock to gain control of a loco that is “lost” for whatever reason. This override is called stealing & can result in having a single loco address selected on two different throttles at the same time.To steal an address ...

Q:  Is it possible to use Digitrax equipment to wire the Kato N-Scale Automatic Track Crossing? If so, how do I do it? A:  The answer is a probable "No", but there may be a workaround. The Kato, USA website notes: Some Unitrack components such as the Automatic Crossing Gate and 3-Color Signal were designed with DC operation only. So, the official position is that that these devices don't work in the DCC environment. However, we are not above speculating on how to do this, nor are others. An online web search turned up this bit of message traffic by ...

I have several old brass locos and they have Pittman motors. I have tried DH163 Decoders and blown two. I believe that they draw excess current that exceeds 1.5amp cont. Is there an HO mobile decoder with the same size physically as DH series, but has higher current ratings? Suggestions? While it is possible that the motor may be drawing too much current, it also may be possible that the motor brushes are not isolated from the frame of the locomotive. It also would be helpful for you to determine the stall current of the locomotive to see if the ...

Do you have a reference for wiring Proto 2000 older geeps with a decoder (not necessarily sound)? We actually have several Life-Like Proto's sitting around for conversion to DCC, including an older GP-18, older FA's and such that date back to the days when DCC was just a twinkle in AJ's eyes. Overall, converting these locomotives will be fairly easy but there are a few things to watch for. Make sure that the decoder has enough capacity to match the current demands of the locomotive mechanism.  You must measure the stall current of the locomotive to determine this.   Make ...

A speed table is a list of numbers, one number for each speed step. Many operators customize their locomotives by adjusting the CV's for Vstart (02), Vmid (06) and Vmax (05) to set the throttle response characteristics for each locomotive. This is known as a three-step speed table It is also possible to create a more complex speed table, either with 14 or 28 steps that specify the exact percentage of full power sent to the motor when the throttle is set to that speed. Speed tables can be set up for 14 or 28 speed steps, but not for ...

Most customers that use Digitrax command stations use Universal Consisting instead of Advanced Consisting as described here.  With Universal consisting, the consist information is handled by the command station instead of by the decoder.CV19 is the advanced consist address. CV19 also contains data for the direction in which the consist will operate. See the table below to determine what value to program into CV19 CV19 Value Effect on Adv Consist Address Normal Direction of Travel of Advanced Consist 000 Advanced Consist Addressing Disabled N/A 001 - 127 Advanced Consist Addressing Enabled Forward 129 - 255 Advanced Consist Addressing Enabled Reverse When ...

Decoders with FX3 features have 8 user configurable, independent special effects generators.  All current production Digitrax Decoders use FX3 function features. These are set up by programming CV values as described below.  If your decoder is not a Series 3 decoder, please check the spec sheet to determine which type of functions it supports.FX3 functions incorporate FX generators with additional dynamic and static qualifiers.  FX3 functions are fully remappable so they can be controlled by any function key on your system.  A master light switch can be set up to turn off all lights on a locomotive. Functions associated with advanced ...

Sound Decoder:  SDH164D SoundFX Wired Mobile Decoder for HO Locomotives Master Volume: CV58=9 to 15, Diesel CV60=1, Bell CV141=64 Max., Horn CV142=64 Max. Speaker: one SP26158B Rectangular 26.5mm x 15.5mm x 9mm, 8Ohms 0.5W Compact Box Speaker with enclsure & wires A 5 Ohm 1/2W resistor in series with the speaker.              Diesel Horn         880Tone Sine Wav.     Horn & 880 Hz together   Factor     dB@4' CV58 MtoP   dB@4' CV58 MtoP   dB@4' CV58 MtoP   x 0.71     67 15  4.00   65 15  4.15   67 15 4.15   ...

Configurable strobes are set up using CV's 49, 50 and 61. Configurable strobe function leads can be programmed with a limited number of simulated lighting effects similar to FX effects but without as many options. Configurable strobes are offered in those few Digitrax decoders where there was not enough "code space" to provide full FX features.CV49 controls F0 Forward, the white function lead. CV50 controls F0 reverse, the yellow function lead.CV61 enables the configurable strobe operation.To set up configurable strobe lights:1. Program CV61 with the CV value "01" to enable configurable strobe operation.2. Program the CV value for CVs 49 ...

Q: I connect my DT400 to my DCS100 and it works fine, but when I add a DB150 working as a booster the DT400 stops working. What is wrong? A: A number of things may cause this, so you can use the diagnostic features of the DT400 to solve this problem. Experience has proven that the most common LocoNet problem is related to pins 3 and 4. By following this diagnostic procedure, you can narrow down to the source of the problem. Starting with DT400 without a battery [The throttle has no battery for this test to assure it executes ...

  Digitrax DCS51 (Zephyr Xtra) Operating Instructions by Dan Bourque v1.0 Selecting a locomotive or consist 1.         Press the “LOCO” key (display will flash) 2.         Enter the address of the locomotive or consist             - For a consist, the address will normally be the lead locomotive             - For a 3-digit locomotive number, use “0” for the first digit 3.         Press the “LOCO” key again (display will stop blinking) 4.         Move the direction selector on the throttle to either “Forward” or “Reverse” 5.         Move the speed knob until train moves   Dispatching (releasing) a locomotive or consist ...

By Zana & A.J. IrelandThis clinic is titled Digital Command Control: The Wave of the Future. Recently, I was asked the question: "DCC has arrived and is the technology of today, everybody's using it so, why don't you change the title of your clinic?" My answer is that digital command control is still evolving rapidly. Today's digital command control is moving beyond the basic NMRA DCC Standards and RPs to encompass many new technologies that will compliment and enhance the basic things we can do with the track format defined by the NMRA. It's an exciting time for model railroaders ...

By Zana & A.J. IrelandThis clinic is titled Digital Command Control: The Wave of the Future. Recently, I was asked the question: "DCC has arrived and is the technology of today, everybody's using it so, why don't you change the title of your clinic?" My answer is that digital command control is still evolving rapidly. Today's digital command control is moving beyond the basic NMRA DCC Standards and RPs to encompass many new technologies that will compliment and enhance the basic things we can do with the track format defined by the NMRA. It's an exciting time for model railroaders ...

Sound Decoder:  SDH164D SoundFX Wired Mobile Decoder for HO Locomotives Maste Volume: CV58=9 to 15, Diesel CV60=1, Bell CV141=64 Max., Horn CV142=64 Max. Speaker:  one SP26158B Rectangular 26.5mm X 15.5mm x 9mm, 8 Ohms 0.5W Compact Box, Speaker with enclosure & wires. A 5 Ohm 1/2W resistor in series with the speaker.              Diesel Horn         880Tone Sine Wav.     Horn & 880 Hz together   Factor     dB@4' CV58 MtoP   dB@4' CV58 MtoP   dB@4' CV58 MtoP   x 0.71     68 15  4.00   65 15  4.10   68 15 4.10 ...

CV29 controls many aspects of the locomotive, including its decoder address (including two or four digit address) , normal direction of travel (NDOT), whether the locomotive opperates at 28 speed steps or 128 and others. Some older Digitrax throttles use hexadecimal notation for programming.  This article is presented for the benefit of those who may still be using these throttles.  CAUTION: if you are NOT using a DT100 or DT200, please disregard this article to avoid confusion.The Addition Method The table below shows each switch and its value if it is on or off. Notice that if the switch is ...

The following chart indicates: Which Digitrax throttle (DT400, DT400R, DT402, DT402R, DT402D, DT500, DT500D, DT602, DT602D, UT4, UT4R, UT4D, UT6 & UT6D) Works with which LocoNet interface throttle panel (Universal Panel-UP3/UP5/UP7, UR90, UR91, UR92, and UR93) Under which types of communication (Tethered, IR Mode, Simplex Radio, or Duplex Radio). Throttle Interface Chart Throttle UP Panel Tethered UR90 Tethered UR90 IR Mode UR91 Tethered UR91 IR Mode UR91 Simplex Radio UR92 Tethered UR92 IR Mode UR92 Duplex Radio UR93 Duplex Radio DT400 Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes No Yes Yes No No DT400R Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes ...

My sound decoder has a capacitor, why do I need a PX112? The capacitor that came with your Digitrax sound decoder is designed to hold up sound operation in the presence of brief power interruptions.  It is not designed to keep the locomotive’s motor and lights running.  Our ears are very sensitive to sound interruptions so, the capacitor on your sound decoder will prevent most of these drop outs on average quality track.  Most people don’t even notice the small pauses in a locomotive’s movement and the small flashes of the lights when the track power is interrupted.  If you ...

Problem: PM42 Short Circuit/Auto-Reversing failure when used with Zephyr (DCS50/DCS51)The PM42 is designed to control 4 independent power subdistricts that can be set up as either a “Short Circuit Manager” (the factory setting) or as an “Auto-Reversing Controller.” The PM42 factory setting for trip current is 3 amps. The trip current can be modified to settings from 1.5 amps – 12 amps to accommodate the needs of your system. In addition, each of the 4 power subdistricts can be set for slow, regular, faster or fastest short circuit management.While a trip current of 3 amps will work with most boosters, ...

CV29 sets the characteristics for 5 different decoder behaviors. The table below shows each characteristic and its value if it is on or off. Notice that if the switch is off the value is zero. Click here to go to the automated CV29 value calculatorTo determine the value to program for your decoder just go down the list and add up the numbers for all the switches you want to set as ON. If you need to convert the decimal valueCV29 Examples of CV Values: The factory default value for CV29 is 06. Switch # Characteristic if OFF Value if ...

DS64 is set up by setting Option Switches (OpSw)This is how to set option switches on the DS64:1. Begin with your DS64 powered up. Turnouts can be either connected or not.2. On the DS64 press and hold the OPS button down for about 3 seconds until the red OPS LED and green ID LED begin to blink alternately. This indicates that the DS64 is ready to change the option switches.3. Using your DCC throttle, select the Switch Address that corresponds to the OpSw number and send the Closed or Thrown command corresponding to the setting you have chosen. Refer to ...

SDH164D SoundFX Wired Mobile Decoder for HO Locomotives Speaker:   Two 28mm dia. 32 Ohm, 0.5 W These speakers are connected in parallel. Master Volume  CV58= 9  to 15,   Diesel CV60 = 1, Bell CV141= 64 Max.,   Horn CV142=  64 Max.            Diesel Horn         880Tone Sine Wav.     Horn & 880 Hz together   Factor     dB@4' CV58 MtoP   dB@4' CV58 MtoP   dB@4' CV58 MtoP   x 0.71     68 15  4.15   66 15  4.25   70 15 4.25   3.00 Vrms   67 12  4.10   65 12  4.20   Each ...

When you are using a throttle to control a locomotive, you will notice that as you increase and decrease the speed, the loco responds to the change in throttle settings according to the relationship between motor voltage applied and the throttle setting.  This is called the throttle response curve.  Decoders are shipped from the factory with a linear throttle response curve.  This means that as you increase the throttle setting from 0 to full speed, the loco will look like the default curve in this diagram.If you want to create a more realistic throttle response curve, you can set up ...

DT400/R’s are shipped from the factory with tetherless release disabled. This prevents you from accidentally touching the LOCO Key and entering address selection while you are running your throttle in tetherless mode. DT400 can be set up to allow locos to be released from the throttle when it is in tetherless mode (IR or radio) by setting DT400 Option #3 according to the following table. Op#3 Value (hex) Backlight Brightness Clock  Format Recall Stack Depth Tether- less Release x00 Off 12 hour format 4 No x01 Low intensity 12 hour fomat 4 No x02 Medium intensity 12 hour format 4 ...

  Sound Decoder:  SDH164D SoundFX Wired Mobile Decoder fopr HO Locomotives Master Volume: CV58=9 to 15, Diesel CV60=1, Bell CV141=64Max., Horn CV142=64 Max. Speaker: 4 inch Dia. 8 Ohm Speaker, 4 Watts with a 3.3 Ohm resistor in series.              Diesel Horn         880Tone Sine Wav.     Horn & 880 Hz together   Factor     dB@4' CV58 MtoP   dB@4' CV58 MtoP   dB@4' CV58 MtoP   x 0.71     79 15  3.85   74 15  4.00   79 15 4.00   2.84 Vrms   78 12  3.80   73 12  3.95   Amplifier ...

Sound Decoder:  SDH164D SoundFX Wired Mobile Decoder for HO Locomotives Master Volume: CV58=9 to 15, Diesel CV60=1, Bell CV141=64 Max., Horn CV142=64 Max.   Speaker: Two SP26158B Rectangular 26.5mm x 15.5mm x 9mm, 8 Ohms 0.5W Compact Box, Speaker with enclosure & wires.  Speakers are wired in series.              Diesel Horn         880Tone Sine Wav.     Horn & 880 Hz together   Factor     dB@4' CV58 MtoP   dB@4' CV58 MtoP   dB@4' CV58 MtoP   x 0.71     67 15  4.20   66 15  4.30   67 15 4.30   3.05 Vrms   ...

Sound Decoder:  SDH164D SoundFx Wired Mobile Decoder for HO Locomotives Master Volume: CV58=9 to 15, Diesel CV60=1, Bell CV141=64 Max., Horn CV142=64 Max. Speaker: Small-Oval 8 Ohm, 1 Watt with a 3.3 Ohm resistor in series. 35mm x 16.2mm or 36.9mm x 18.3mm w/enclosure 8.1mm High or 9.1mm w/enclosure Tonystrains see dreamspeakers              Diesel Horn         880Tone Sine Wav.     Horn & 880 Hz together   Factor     dB@4' CV58 MtoP   dB@4' CV58 MtoP   dB@4' CV58 MtoP   x 0.71     67 15  4.00   65 15  4.15   67 15 4.15   ...

Sound Decoder:  SDH164D SoundFX Wired Mobile Decoder for HO Locomotives Master Volume CV58= 9 to 15, Diesel CV60=1, Bell CV141=64, Horn Cv142=64 Max. Speaker:  One 28mm dia. 32 Ohm 0.5W Speaker is enclosed, and is hanging by the wires.              Diesel Horn         880Tone Sine Wav.     Horn & 880 Hz together   Factor     dB@4' CV58 MtoP   dB@4' CV58 MtoP   dB@4' CV58 MtoP   x 0.71     69 15  4.55   67 15  4.60   70 15 4.75   3.35 Vrms   67 12  4.35   65 12  4.55    The ...

Sound Decoder:  SDH164D SoundFX Wired Mobile Decoder for HO Locomotives   Master Volume: CV58= 9 to 15, Diesel CV60=1, Bell CV141=64 Max., Horn CV142=64Max. Speaker: One SP26158B Rectangualr 26.5mm x 15.5mm x 9mm, 8 Ohms 0.5W One SP53188B 53mm X 18mm X14mm, 8 Ohms 0.5W Speakers are wired in series.              Diesel Horn         880Tone Sine Wav.     Horn & 880 Hz together   Factor     dB@4' CV58 MtoP   dB@4' CV58 MtoP   dB@4' CV58 MtoP   x 0.71     69 15  4.15   65 15  4.30   69 15 4.30   3.05 ...

Sound Decoder:   SDH164D SoundFX Wired Mobile Decoder for HO Locomotives   Speaker:Two SP53188B 53mm x 18mm x 14mm 8 Ohms 0.5W  Rectangular Box These two 8 ohms are wired in series.   Master Volume: CV58= 9 to 15,   Diesel CV60 = 1, Bell CV141= 64 Max.,   Horn CV142= 64 Max.                Diesel Horn         880Tone Sine Wav.     Horn & 880 Hz together   Factor     dB@4' CV58 MtoP   dB@4' CV58 MtoP   dB@4' CV58 MtoP   x 0.71     71 15  4.15   67 15  4.30   71 15 4.30   ...

Sound Decoder   SDH164D SoundFX Wired Mobile Decoder for HO Locomotives   Master Volume CV58= 9  to 15,   Diesel CV60 = 1, Bell CV141= 64 Max.,   Horn CV142=  64 Max.   Speaker:   One 28mm dia. 32 Ohm, 0.5 W Not enclosed, and is hanging by the wires.                Diesel Horn         880Tone Sine Wav.     Horn & 880 Hz together   Factor     dB@4' CV58 MtoP   dB@4' CV58 MtoP   dB@4' CV58 MtoP   x 0.71     66 15  4.55   64 15  4.60   67 15 4.75   3.35 Vrms   64 ...

The look up table below shows the results of different CV values that you can program into CV29. CV values are shown in both hex & decimal. In practice, most Digitrax operators now only use decimal. CV29 Values: The factory default value for CV29 is 06. CV Value For CV29 Hex   Dec Speed Steps/ Speed Table Analog Mode Conversion Normal Direction Of Travel 2 or 4 Digit Address x00 000 14 OFF Forward 2 x01 001 14 OFF Reverse 2 x02 002 28/128 OFF Forward 2 x03 003 28/128 OFF Reverse 2 x04 004 14 ON Forward 2 x05 005 ...

CV29 is called the configuration register. It controls the following decoder characteristics: 1.  Whether the decoder uses 14 speed steps, 28/128 speed steps or loadable speed tables.  This affects how smoothly the loco will move and how it responds to throttle controls.2.  Whether the decoder automatically converts to analog mode when no DCC signal is present.  This allows the decoder to operate on a DC layout even though it is DCC equipped.3.  Defines the normal direction of travel for the locomotive. Normal Direction of Travel or NDOT can be changed when the motor connections of decoder have not been connected so that the locomotive runs ...